JP6813018B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine draws a lot based on the fact that predetermined lottery conditions are satisfied, and when the lottery result is a predetermined result, a transition to a winning state occurs. to that (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-39323

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a launching means for launching a game ball toward a gaming area based on a launching operation by the player.
A variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball entry control means that executes variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is set to the open state, and
A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition the gaming state based on the satisfaction of predetermined conditions, and
Specific control setting means for setting the variable ball entry control to a specific control state in which the variable ball entry control is performed a predetermined number of times based on the determination result of the transition determination means corresponding to the transition of the gaming state. When,
In a game machine equipped with
As a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once in the variable ball entry control means, a plurality of types of unit modes are set so that the mode when the variable ball entry means is in the open state is different. And
As the execution mode of the specific control state, the specific unit mode in which the ball is relatively likely to enter the variable ball entry means among the plurality of types of unit modes is executed according to the number of times during the specific control state. The first execution mode and the second execution mode are set in advance so that the number of times the predetermined unit mode in which the ball is relatively unlikely to enter the variable ball entry means is continuously executed is different.
This game machine is
The first display means and
A second display means whose display range is set narrower than that of the first display means,
A first display control means for causing the first side corresponding display to be performed by the first display means when a transition to the specific control state occurs.
A second display control means for causing the second side corresponding display to be performed by the second display means when a transition to the specific control state occurs.
With
The first execution mode and the second execution mode differ in the number of times the predetermined unit mode is continuously executed .
The first display control means has a case of shifting to the specific control state of the first execution mode and a case of shifting to the specific control state of the second execution mode, the first execution mode and the second execution mode. A means for enabling the first-side correspondence display to be performed in a mode in which it is not possible to identify which of the execution modes the specific control state is executed is provided.
The second display control means corresponds to the second side in different modes depending on the case of shifting to the specific control state of the first execution mode and the case of shifting to the specific control state of the second execution mode. With means to ensure that the display is done
The specific control state of the first execution mode has a configuration in which the specific unit mode is executed more times than the specific control state of the second execution mode.
The gaming state after the end of the specific control state of the first execution mode is more advantageous than the gaming state after the end of the specific control state of the second execution mode.

According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine in development. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine in development. (A) is a front view showing the configuration of a game board, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining a variable winning device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of the symbol display apparatus (a)-(j). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of the symbol display apparatus (a), (b). It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) the winning / failing table for a low probability mode, and (b) explanatory drawing for explaining the winning / failing table for a high probability mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process which is executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a round executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening and closing process executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening process which is executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process executed by MPU of a voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process for opening / closing execution mode executed by MPU of a voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by MPU of a display control device. (A) An explanatory diagram showing a data table of the effect A1, (b) an explanatory diagram showing a data table of the effect A2, and (c) an explanatory diagram showing a data table of the effect A3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various game results. It is a timing chart for explaining the content of each opening / closing execution mode. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the outline of the electric structure of the game hall where a lot of pachinko machines are installed. (A) A rear view of the pachinko machine showing the external terminal board and its surroundings in an enlarged manner, (b) an explanatory view for explaining an external output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control device, and (c) an external terminal board. It is a block diagram for demonstrating an electrical structure. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of mode transition executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process for delay executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed in MPU of a hall computer. (A) A timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the external output in the open / close execution mode of the pattern D, and (b) For explaining the execution timing of the external output in the open / close execution mode of the pattern A shifted from the low frequency support mode. It is a timing chart. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the external output in the open / close execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of an external output in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of mode transition executed by MPU of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed in MPU of a hall computer. It is a flowchart which shows the reception confirmation processing of the 1st to 3rd signals executed by MPU of a hall computer. (A) A flowchart showing an output process of management data executed by the MPU of the hall computer, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the data extracted from the management data in the hall computer. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process executed by the MPU of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening and closing process executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening process which is executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed in MPU of a hall computer.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment.

The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is supposed to be movable.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 24, and FIG. 4B is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the variable winning device 32 provided on the game board 24.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port (first starting ball entry section) 33, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry section) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, The main display unit 43, the accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided, respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 24. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when the ball enters the upper operating port 33 and when the ball enters the lower operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out, and the ball enters the general winning port 31. When it occurs, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when the variable winning device 32 is entered, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the number of prize balls related to the lower operating port 34 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the upper operating port 33, and the number of prize balls of both operating ports 33 and 34 is large. It may be different. Further, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration that is larger than the number of other prize balls, and for example, the number of prize balls related to the general winning opening 31 may be smaller.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 37, the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball is also referred to as a prize.

The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the upper actuating port 33 and the lower actuating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 33 faces upward. The lower operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 34a is connected to the electric accessory drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory drive unit 34b to be in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) and It is placed in either the open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 34a is closed, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is opened, the lower operating port 34 can be won.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the state in which the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 is likely to occur and the state in which the winning is more difficult to occur than the state in which the winning is not impossible but the above-mentioned winning is likely to occur. The accessory 34a may be switched. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be inadequate, and switching between a state in which a prize is likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the lower operating port 34 itself.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. .. The opening / closing door 32b is connected to a variable winning drive unit 32c integrally provided as a variable winning device 32 (the connection location is not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 32c to be in a closed state and an open state. It is placed in one of. Specifically, it is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery, the game ball is switched to an open state in which a prize can be won. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the player shifts to a big hit or a special loss. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult to generate a prize than in the open state.

In the main display unit 43, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is performed. The result of the internal lottery based on this is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the winning of the lower operating port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display unit 43, which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After it is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The main display unit 43 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a plurality of patterns are displayed. It is conceivable that the seed colors are switched and displayed.

In the accessory display unit 44, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is obtained. Explicitly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol, and a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41. Has been done. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

In the symbol display device 41, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. That is, when the main display unit 43 performs the variable display, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display accordingly.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern consists of nine kinds of main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

As shown in FIG. 6 (b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G.

When the effect for game rotation is performed on the display screen G based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display starts at. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game use. The production of is finished.

In addition, when the production for the game round is completed, if the game round corresponds to the occurrence of the most advantageous jackpot result described later, a combination of symbols with the same odd number is formed on one of the effective lines. , If it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined low-accuracy jackpot result described later, a combination of symbols having the same even number is formed on any of the effective lines. Further, if the result is different from these and the game times correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a predetermined combination of symbols is formed although it is not a combination of symbols with the same number. The contents of each game result will be described later.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variation display is started on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. Corresponds to one game.

Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a first holding lamp unit 45 corresponding to the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first holding lamp unit 45.

A second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 42. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the second holding lamp unit 46. It should be noted that the functions of the holding lamp units 45 and 46 may be fulfilled by the display in a part of the area of the symbol display device 41.

An inner rail portion 48 and an outer rail portion 49 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is formed by the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49, and the game is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and is stored in the launch rail 52 extending toward the guide rail and the upper plate 61a described later. It includes a ball feeding device 53 that supplies a game ball onto the launch rail 52, and a solenoid 54 that is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied on the launch rail 52 toward the guide rail. The solenoid 54 is driven and controlled by operating the firing handle 55 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 56 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 57 is fitted therein. The window panel 57 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the game area can be visually recognized through the window panel 57 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. If possible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 56. An indicator lamp portion 58 is provided above the window portion 56 as a part of various lamp portions. Further, on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp unit 58, speaker units 59 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 that bulge toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 61a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 62a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 61a.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game, and a voice or lamp display and a display control device (not shown) are controlled. The voice emission control device 72, which controls the sound emission control device 72, is installed.

The substrate box 71a of the main control device 71 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is formed, and an adhesive layer is adhered at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the case is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71 and the voice emission control device 72. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism portion 74 and a control device collecting unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

The payout mechanism unit 74 includes a tank 76 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 77 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 76. The game ball paid out from the payout device 77 is discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 77. The payout mechanism unit 74 is mounted with a back pack substrate having, for example, a main power supply of 24 volts AC and a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device collective unit 75 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 78 having a function of controlling the payout device 77 and various control devices and the like, and at the same time, a game associated with the operation of the launch handle 55 by the player. It includes a power supply and a launch control device 79 for controlling the launch of the ball. The payout control device 78 and the power supply and launch control device 79 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 78 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 73 is provided with an external terminal plate 81 in addition to the payout mechanism unit 74 and the control device collective unit 75. The external terminal plate 81 is installed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 at the upper corner portion of the back pack unit 15 on the rotation base end side. The external terminal board 81 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the external terminal plate 81 will be described later.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 95 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A certain RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 71.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 95 and a payout control device 78 provided in the main control device 71 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. In this case, a power supply and a launch control device 79 having a function of supplying operating power are connected to the power failure monitoring board 95, and power is supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 95.

Further, various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 96a to 96e are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are provided with one-to-one detection for winning winning portions such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, and a through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 92 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 92, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 78, and a voice emission control device 72 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 78 based on the winning determination result for the prize-winning ball winning unit. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 72. Details of these various commands will be described later.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, a variable winning drive unit 32c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 34b for opening / closing the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, and a main display unit. 43 and the display unit 44 for the accessory are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 92 so that the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 92 so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 92.

Further, an external terminal plate 81 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 sets information according to the progress of the game in the external output buffer 94d provided in the RAM 94. Then, according to the information set in the external output buffer 94d, the signal output setting is made to the external terminal board 81, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer HC in the game hall. The contents of such a setting will be described later.

The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power supply and launch control device 79, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 79. The payout control device 78 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 77 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

The power supply and launch control device 79 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 91, the payout control device 78, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply and the launch control device 79 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 71. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 79 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The voice emission control device 72 includes a voice emission control board 101 on which the MPU 102 is mounted. The MPU 102 is a ROM 103 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 103 is executed. A RAM 104, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. Based on the command received from the main control device 71, the MPU 102 drives and controls various lamp units 45, 46, 58 and the speaker unit 59, and transmits a command to the display control device 111.

The display control device 111 is a display control board 112 on which an MPU 113, which is an element in which a program ROM 114 and a work RAM 115 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 116, a character ROM 117, and a video RAM 118, respectively, are mounted. It has.

The MPU 113 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 72 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 116 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 116).

The program ROM 114 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 113, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The work RAM 115 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 113, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is.

The VDP116 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP116 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 116 adjusts the timings of the MPU 113, the video RAM 118, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 118 from the character ROM 117 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 117 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 117 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 118 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 118.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 92 of main control device 71>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery with the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 92 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable type counter for determining the display duration in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41. CS and are to be used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is set to the electric service open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired in the RAM 94 when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a provided as a storage means.

The holding ball storage area 94a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, according to the winning history of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. , The combination of each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 Each numerical information is stored in the order of RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the upper working port 33 or the lower working opening 34 can be held and stored. Further, the hold area RE includes a hold number storage area NA, and the hold number storage area NA is used to specify the number of winning histories stored in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Information is stored.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43, and at the start of one game round. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 94c of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is open per unit time when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of occurrence is relatively high or low.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. ing. In this case, when the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the electric accessory 34a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (that is, that is secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed) is secured as compared with the low-frequency support mode. The duration of one display on the accessory display unit 44) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 34 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 33 is higher than that of the lower operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 34 is more likely than the upper operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the accessory display unit 44 based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration where multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. May be done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average securing time and increasing the winning probability. ..

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 93a as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, as the pass / fail tables, the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) in FIG. 9 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high) in FIG. 9 (b). Probability pass / fail information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9A, the value of the random number that wins the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9B, the value of the random number that wins the big hit is 21. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode.

If the winning probability of the high-probability mode is higher than that of the low-probability mode, the number and value of the above-mentioned winning random numbers are arbitrary, and the jackpot random number that is the jackpot winning in the low-probability mode. The value group of the counter C1 may or may not include only a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot winning in the situation of the high probability mode.

Further, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a loss result except for the value of the random number that is a big hit, but in this pachinko machine 10, as a loss result, a special loss result (small hit result) and a normal loss result are obtained. Two types are set. Neither the special deviation result nor the normal deviation result triggers the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode, but the special deviation result triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, whereas the normal deviation result shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. It does not trigger the transition of.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 93b as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the distribution destinations of the jackpot results are low probability jackpot result A (or sudden normal jackpot result), low probability jackpot result B (or normal jump-up jackpot result), and low probability jackpot result C (or normal jackpot result). Jackpot result), implicit high-accuracy jackpot result A (or latent probability variation jackpot result), implicit high-accuracy jackpot result B (or latent probability variation jump-up jackpot result), explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A (or sudden probability variation jackpot result), The explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B (or the first sudden jump-up jackpot result), the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C (or the second sudden jump-up jackpot result), and the most advantageous jackpot result are set. The jackpot type counters C2 are assigned to each of these jackpot results so as not to overlap each other.

Each of these jackpot results consists of three contents: (1) content related to the opening / closing execution mode, (2) content related to the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) content related to the support mode after completing the opening / closing execution mode. Of the contents, at least one content is different. The details will be described later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture), and the final stop result is the grant response result in the game times that result in a predetermined jackpot. In order to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the result of the above-mentioned granting in the game machine before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. The display state of. Specifically, regarding the grant response result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is performed in a symbol sequence is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol rows. In the situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result or the special loss result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the normal deviation result, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If executed.

On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the main control device 71, but by the voice emission control device 72. In this case, in the voice emission control device 72, the game times corresponding to either the jackpot result or the special deviation result are more likely to generate the notice display and the appearance rate than the game times corresponding to the normal deviation result. The lottery process for displaying the notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that the low notice display is likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 92 to determine the display duration on the main display unit 43 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation display on the main display unit 43 and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 71>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed for advancing the game by the MPU 92 in the main control device 71 will be described. In the MPU 92, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the main process activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. The description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically started by the MPU 92 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are read, the states of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are determined, and the winning detection information is saved. Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e corresponding to the generation of the winning ball, the prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 78 to pay out the prize ball is set. To do. For example, when the winning of the variable winning device 32 is detected, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number, is set. In the following step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 94.

In the following step S104, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the thru gate 35 is executed. In the through winning process, when the through gate 35 has been won, the number of winnings held in the electric service holding area 94c is less than the upper limit (for example, "4"). On condition that, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 94c. In addition, the voice emission control device 72 is subjected to a process for turning on the second hold lamp unit 46 corresponding to the number of reserved characters.

After that, in steps S105 to S108, a winning process for the operating port is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S105, it is determined whether or not a winning is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. If no prize has been won, this timer interrupt process is terminated as it is.

If a prize has been won, in step S106, is the start hold storage number NA stored in the hold number storage area NA of the hold ball storage area 94a less than the upper limit value (for example, "4")? Judge whether or not. If the start hold storage number NA is the upper limit value, the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is, and if the start hold storage number NA is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S107.

In step S107, the start hold storage number NA is added by 1. In the following step S108, each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored as hold information in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 94a. In this case, it is stored in the first hold area of the free hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE, that is, the hold area corresponding to the current number of start hold storages. In addition, the voice emission control device 72 is subjected to a process for lighting the first hold lamp unit 45 corresponding to the number of start hold storages. After executing the process of step S108, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S209 and S210 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 78. Further, when a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, it is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72. Further, the output of the external terminal plate 81 is set according to the information set in the external output buffer 94d of the RAM 94. Such processing will be described in detail later.

In the following step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 94.

In the following step S203, a game time control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In the game time control process, the winning / failing determination and the distribution determination are performed, and the symbol variation display is set by the symbol display device 41 and the display control of the main display unit 43 is performed. The details of the game time control process will be described later.

After that, in step S204, the game state transition process is executed. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like.

In the following step S205, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is executed. In this electric service support process, the electric service is released depending on whether or not the electric service 34a is opened by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 94c of the RAM 94. A lottery is performed, and when the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

Here, as described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes by the electric accessory 34a, and the game state transition process shifts to either support mode. Be told. In this case, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94, the high frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the RAM 94 is in the high frequency support mode by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set. Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened is set more than in the case of the low-frequency support mode, and once when the electric accessory open state is won. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory 34a is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

By the way, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94.

In the following step S206, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch period is provided on condition that a launch permission signal output from the power supply and the launch control device 79 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the launch handle 55. The solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 51 is excited once every (for example, 0.6 sec). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the RAM 94. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 95 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 95 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 92, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last processing of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal processing It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 207 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, so the power failure processing after step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S212, access to the RAM 94 is prohibited in step S213, and then the power supply is completely shut off for processing. Continues an infinite loop until can no longer be executed.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game rotation control process in step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game time control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S302, that is, the game round start process of steps S303 to S305 and the game round progress process of steps S306 to S310. Time The control process ends. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating ports 33 and 34 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, in step S302, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. If the main display unit 43 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S303 to S305. In the game round start process, first, in step S303, the hold number storage area NA of the hold ball storage area 94a is referred to, and whether or not the start hold storage number NA, which is the number of hold information held and stored, is “0”. Is determined. When the start hold storage number NA is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 94a. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number NA is not “0”, the data setting process is executed in step S304.

In the data setting process, first, the start hold storage number NA is subtracted by 1. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 94a is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed.

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first reserved area RE1 and the second. The data in each area is shifted such that the holding area RE2 → the first holding area RE1, the third holding area RE3 → the second holding area RE2, the fourth holding area RE4 → the third holding area RE3.

In the data setting process, a process for causing the voice emission control device 72 to recognize that the hold information has been shifted and changing the display in the first hold lamp unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds is executed. To do.

After the data setting process is executed, the variation start process is executed in step S305, and then the game turn control process is terminated. Here, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S401, the pass / fail determination process is executed. In the winning / failing determination process, it is first determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode is referred to among the tables stored in the hit / miss table storage area 93a, and the hit / miss judgment information among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability, and if it does not match the jackpot numerical information, does it match the numerical information for special deviation? Judge whether or not. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to among the tables stored in the hit / miss table storage area 93a for the low probability mode. It is determined whether or not the information matches the jackpot numerical information for low probability, and if it does not match the jackpot numerical information, it is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information for special deviation.

In the following step S402, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S401 is the jackpot winning result. If it is a jackpot winning result, the distribution determination process is executed in step S403.

In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 93b, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 grasped above. Specifically, low-accuracy jackpot result A, low-accuracy jackpot result B, low-accuracy jackpot result C, unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B, explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A, explicit high-accuracy jackpot. It is specified which of the result B, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C, and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to.

In the following step S404, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 93. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is set differently for each type of the jackpot result, and in step S404, it is specified in step S403. The RAM 94 stores information on the mode of the pattern according to the type of jackpot result.

The information on the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the type counter C2. In this case, the mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each game result, or a plurality of types of patterns may be set for each game result.

In the following step S405, a process of setting a flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S403 in the RAM 94 is executed. Specifically, when it is specified that the low probability jackpot result A is specified, the low probability A flag is set, and when it is specified that the low probability jackpot result B is specified, the low probability B flag is set and the low probability is set. If it is specified that the result is a certain jackpot result C, the low probability C flag is set, and if it is specified that the result is an implicit high probability jackpot result A, the implicit A flag is set and the implicit high probability jackpot is set. If it is specified that it is the result B, the unspecified B flag is set, and if it is specified that it is the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A, the explicit A flag is set, and it is the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B. If you specify, set the explicit B flag, if you specify that it is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C, set the explicit C flag, and if you specify that it is the most advantageous jackpot result, it is the most advantageous. Set the flag. In the following description, the determination of whether or not the result is various jackpots is performed by determining whether or not the flag corresponding to the RAM 94 is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the result is not the jackpot winning result, it is determined in step S406 whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S401 is a special deviation result. If the result is a special deviation, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S407, the stop result setting process for the special deviation result is executed. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time is specified from the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 93. , The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result. In the following step S408, a process of setting the special off flag in the RAM 94 is executed.

If it is determined in step S406 that the result is not a special deviation result, the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result is executed in step S409. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time is specified from the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 93. , The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S405, step S408, and step S409, the display duration (display duration) setting process is executed in step S410.

In such a process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 94 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, even if it is neither the most advantageous jackpot result nor the low probability jackpot result C, it is not the other jackpot result or the special deviation result, and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE. If is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 93, and the display thereof is obtained. The duration information is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 93. Then, the display duration information is set in the display duration counter. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired by referring to the non-reach display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table.

The display duration information when the reach does not occur is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of start hold storage numbers NA increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter display duration is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The display duration table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display duration may not change depending on the start hold storage number NA and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the display duration when reach occurs. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of various jackpot results, a special deviation result, an deviation reach, and a normal deviation result in which reach does not occur. In this case, the display duration is distributed according to each game result.

After executing the display duration setting process in step S410, the variable command and the type command are set in step S411. The variable command contains information on the display duration. Here, as described above, the display duration acquired by referring to the non-reach display duration table is different from the display duration acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table, and therefore varies. Even if the command for the command does not include information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 72, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify the presence / absence of reach occurrence from the information on the display duration. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, in the type command, as the game result information, the information of the low-accuracy jackpot result A, the information of the low-accuracy jackpot result B, the information of the low-accuracy jackpot result C, the information of the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, and the unspecified high Information on the probability jackpot result B, information on the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A, information on the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B, information on the explicit high accuracy jackpot result C, information on the most advantageous jackpot result, information on the special deviation result, and normal deviation. Contains result information.

The variation command and the type command set in step S411 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The processing in the voice emission control device 72 due to receiving these commands will be described later.

After the process of step S411 is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 43 in step S412. Then, in step S413, after executing the external output release process, the change start process ends. The content of the external output release process will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 13), when the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S306 to S310 is executed.

In the game round progress process, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the display duration of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the display duration information stored in the display duration counter of the RAM 94 is "0". As described above, the value of the display duration information is set in the display duration setting process (step S410). Further, the value of the set display duration information is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated.

If the display duration has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 43 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the display duration has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S308. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 94 is specified in any of the processes of step S404, step S407, and step S409 of the variation start process (FIG. 14) executed when the currently executed game round is started. The display control of the main display unit 43 is performed so that the mode of the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 43.

Here, the mode of the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is different for each game result. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually confirm the game result of the game time by visually observing the main display unit 43 at the end of the game time. For example, the pachinko machine 10 behaves in the same manner as the jackpot result. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being carried out. On the other hand, the display range of the main display unit 43 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the mode of the design stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is compared with at least various jackpot results and special deviation results. If this happens, it will be difficult for the player to recognize it. Therefore, it is expected that the player confirms the game result of the game times not from the main display unit 43 but from the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the degree of attention to the display screen G is increased.

In the following step S309, the variable end command is set. The variable end command set here is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 72 executes a process for ending the effect in the game round based on receiving the variable end command. It should be noted that the voice emission control device 72 or the display control device 111 may independently end the effect for the game round without transmitting the fluctuation end command.

After that, in step S310, after executing the external output setting process for the number of games, the main game times control process is terminated. The content of the external output setting process for the number of games will be described in detail later.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 of one game round is completed. If it is not the timing when the variation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times finished this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is one of the big hit results or the special off result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S504 whether or not the game result of this time is a special deviation result. In the case of a special deviation result, in step S505, the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 is one of the termination conditions of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special deviation result. Set "9" as the upper limit number. Further, in step S506, "15" is set in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. The open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the number of times the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed by the MPU 92.

On the other hand, if it is not a special deviation result, that is, if it is one of the big hit results, "15" is set in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S507. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open / close execution mode by the MPU 92.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, as the opening / closing execution mode, a round number regulation mode in which a predetermined number of round games are executed as an upper limit and a round game are not set, and the number of times of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 is set. An opening / closing number regulation mode is set, which is terminated based on the condition that the maximum number of times is reached and that a predetermined maximum number of game balls win the large winning opening 32a. There is. It shifts to the round number regulation mode based on one of the big hit results, and shifts to the open / close number regulation mode based on the special off result.

Here, the round game is a condition that either the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the large winning opening 32a. It is a game that continues until is satisfied. Further, the number of round games executed in the round number specified mode is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

After executing the process of step S507, the setting process for the round is executed in step S508. The setting process for the round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, "9" is set in the winning counter PC of the RAM 94 as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game. This number is the same as the maximum number of open / close number specified modes that shift when a special deviation result occurs. In the following step S602, it is determined whether or not this time is the process for specifying the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 in the 1st round of the round number regulation mode. This time, since it is the setting process for the round started at the start of the round number regulation mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S602, and the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the round number regulation mode this time is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C. If the result is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C, the setting process ends after setting "19" in the open / close counter SOC in step S604. If it is not the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C, in step S605, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B. If the result is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, the setting process ends after setting "15" in the open / close counter SOC in step S606. If it is not the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, in step S607, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition is the low-accuracy jackpot result B or the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B. If any of the jackpot results is obtained, the setting process ends after setting "8" in the open / close counter SOC in step S608. If it is not the result of any of the big hits, in step S609, after setting "1" in the open / close counter SOC, this setting process ends.

That is, although it is not one-to-one depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition, the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 set in the 1st round is different. The processing after step S610 will be described later.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 15), after executing the process of step S506 or step S508, in step S509, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 has a waiting time for opening. Set "2000" as (waiting period). The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 4 sec. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

Further, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the waiting time for the opening is set in step S509 regardless of the type of the game result that triggered the mode. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening of the open / close execution mode is the same regardless of the type of the game result that triggered the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for the opening is slightly different, the configuration may be such that the player recognizes the same, for example, the most advantageous jackpot result. When a part of the game results is the trigger, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where the other game results are the trigger.

After executing the process of step S509, the opening command is set in step S510. This opening command contains information on the game result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time. Further, the opening command set here is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The processing in the voice emission control device 72 due to the reception of the opening command will be described later.

After that, in step S511, after executing the external output setting process at the time of mode transition, the game state transition process is terminated. The contents of the external output setting process at the time of mode transition will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S512. In step S512, an external output setting process for delay is executed. The content of the external output setting process for the delay will be described in detail later. In the following step S513, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed. The opening / closing process of the large winning opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 32a is open. If the large winning opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S702 whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0", and in step S703, whether the value of the timer counter T is "0". Determine if not.

By the way, when the open / close execution mode (step S501: YES) is in progress, the large winning opening 32a is closed (step S701: NO), and the open / close counter SOC value is "0" (step S702: YES). ) Means that the waiting time for the ending is in progress. Further, in the open / close execution mode (step S501: YES), the large winning opening 32a is closed (step S701: NO), and the value of the open / close counter SOC is not “0” (step S702: NO). Further, when the value of the timer counter T is not "0" (step S703: NO), it is during the waiting time for the opening or during the waiting time from the closing of the large winning opening 32a to the opening again. Means that.

If the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. If the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter T is "0", the large winning opening opening / closing process is performed after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S704. finish.

The large winning opening opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, the game result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is one of the low accuracy jackpot result A, the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A, the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A, and the special deviation result. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, "30" is set in the timer counter T in step S802. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started as described above, the release time set in step S802 is set. It is 60 msec.

When a negative judgment is made in step S801, the situation in which the current big winning opening opening process is activated in step S803 is that the game result triggered by the above is the low probability big hit result B and the 1st round ~ Whether the game result that triggered the above is the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B and whether it corresponds to the 1st to 2nd rounds, the game result that triggered the above is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result. Whether it corresponds to the 1st to 2nd rounds as well as B, or whether the game result that triggered the above corresponds to the explicit high accuracy jackpot result C and the 1st round, which is not the final opening / closing timing. , Is determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, "30" is set in the timer counter T in step S802. If a negative determination is made in step S803, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, the situation in which the large winning opening opening process is activated corresponds to the situation in which the game result that triggered the above is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C and the first round and the final opening / closing timing. Determine if it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S804, "10000" is set in the timer counter T in step S805. If a negative determination is made in step S804, "14500" is set in the timer counter T in step S806. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated as described above, the release time set in step S805 is 20 sec. And the opening time set in step S806 is 29 sec.

After executing the process of step S802, step S805 or step S806, the open execution process is executed in step S807. In the open execution process, the variable winning drive unit 32c is driven and controlled so that the large winning opening 32a is in the open state.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types are set for one opening mode of the variable winning device 32, with different opening durations (opening durations) from the opening of the large winning opening 32a to the closing. Has been done. Specifically, a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the opening duration is set to 29 sec, which is the maximum time, and a medium-time mode (long-term mode) in which the opening duration is set to 20 sec, which is an intermediate time shorter than the longest time. A medium-term mode) and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the opening duration is set to 0.06 sec, which is the shortest time shorter than the intermediate time, are set.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the launch handle 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. Be controlled. Further, in the round game, the upper limit number of the end condition is set to 9, and in the open / close number regulation mode, the upper limit number of the end condition is set to 9. Then, in the long-time mode and the medium-time mode among the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set for a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or the opening / closing number specified mode. Will be there. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening time is shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or the opening / closing number specified mode, and more specifically, the opening time is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. The duration is set. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in the long-time mode or the medium-time mode, the number of the variable winning device 32 is equal to the maximum number in one round game or the opening / closing number specified mode for the large winning opening 32a. It is expected that a prize will be generated, and if the variable prize device 32 is opened once in a short time mode, the prize will not be generated in the large prize opening 32a, or even if a prize is generated, one piece will be generated. It is expected to be about.

Further, depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition and the progress of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening mode set for one opening of the variable winning device 32 differs, although it is not one-to-one. ing.

After executing the process of step S807, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the opening of the large winning opening 32a this time is related to a new start of the round game in the round number specified mode. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S808, the round start command is set in step S809, then the main prize opening process is ended, and if a negative judgment is made in step S808, the main prize is awarded as it is. End the mouth opening process. The round start command set in step S809 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and it is recognized that the voice emission control device 72 has newly started the round game. To.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S701 that the large winning opening 32a is open, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, by determining whether or not the timer counter T is “0”, it is determined whether or not the opening duration has elapsed for the opening of the current large winning opening 32a. If the timer counter T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S706.

In step S706, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 32a. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is. If a prize has been won, the numerical information of the prize counter PC is updated so as to be subtracted by 1 in step S707. In the following step S708, it is determined whether or not this is the first R of the round number regulation mode and the opening mode of the variable winning device 32 is the short-time mode. In this situation, a premium command is set in step S709. Here, the set premium command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The processing in the voice emission control device 72 due to the reception of the premium command will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S708 or after the process of step S709 is executed, it is determined in step S710 whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". If the winning counter PC is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. If the winning counter PC is "0", the closing execution process is executed in step S711. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is terminated so that the currently open large winning opening 32a is closed.

In the following step S712, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a special deviation result. If it is not a special deviation result, a round end command is set in step S713. The round end command set here is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice emission control device 72 recognizes that the round game has ended.

In the following step S714, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and then in step S715, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the round setting process is executed in step S716. The setting process for the round will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the round setting process, as described above, first, in step S601, "9" is set in the winning counter PC, and in the following step S602, this time is the variable winning device 32 in the 1st round of the round number regulation mode. It is determined whether or not the process is for specifying the number of times of opening and closing of. This time, since it is the setting process for the round started in the middle of the round number regulation mode, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the process proceeds to step S610.

In step S610, it is determined whether or not this time is the process for specifying the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 in the second round of the round number regulation mode. If it corresponds to the 2nd round, in step S611, whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the round number regulation mode this time is the low probability jackpot result B or the unspecified high probability jackpot result B. Is determined. If any of these jackpot results is obtained, the setting process ends after setting "8" in the open / close counter SOC in step S612. If none of the above jackpot results is obtained, the setting process ends after setting "1" in the open / close counter SOC in step S613.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S610 that this time does not correspond to the second R, the present setting process ends after setting "1" in the open / close counter SOC in step S614.

That is, although it is not one-to-one depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition, the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 set in the 2nd round is different. On the other hand, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition, the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 set after the 3rd round is common to one.

Returning to the explanation of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 17), after executing the round setting process in step S716, after setting "750" in the timer counter T in step S717, the main winning opening opening / closing process is performed. End the process. The numerical information set in this case is numerical information for the round start waiting time between consecutive round games, and 1.5 sec is set in the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the numerical information for the round start waiting time is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the round number specified mode and regardless of the progress of the round number specified mode.

If it is determined in step S712 that the game result that triggered the transition is a special deviation result, or if it is determined in step S715 that the round counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S718. In step S718, "3000" is set in the timer counter T as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the waiting time for the ending is 6 sec, which is longer than the waiting time for the opening. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated, the waiting time for the ending is set in step S718 regardless of the type of the game result that triggered the closing / closing execution mode. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for the ending is slightly different, the configuration may be such that the player recognizes the same, for example, the most advantageous jackpot result. When a part of the game results is the trigger, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where the other game results are the trigger.

After executing the process of step S718, the ending command is set in step S719, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. The ending command set in step S719 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice emission control device 72 recognizes that the open / close execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S705 that the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S720. In step S720, the closing execution process is executed. The content of the closing execution process is the same as that in step S711.

In the following step S721, the numerical information of the open / close counter SOC is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and in step S722, it is determined whether or not the open / close counter SOC is “0”. If the open / close counter SOC is not "0", the timer counter T is set to "750" in step S717, and then the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed.

The numerical information set in step S717 in the flow of the above processing is numerical information for the opening standby time from the open state to the closed state of the variable winning device 32 until the variable winning device 32 is subsequently opened again. In machine 10, 1.5 sec is set. In this case, the numerical information for the opening / closing standby time is the same regardless of the type of the game result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode and regardless of the progress of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, the numerical information for the open waiting time is the same as the numerical information for the round start waiting time between consecutive round games. As a result, the opening standby time when the variable winning device 32 is continuously opened and closed can be made constant at all times.

If it is determined in step S722 that the open / close counter SOC is "0", the process proceeds to step S723. In step S723, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that is being executed this time is a special deviation result.

If the game result that triggered the above is not a special deviation result, that is, if the game result that triggered the above is one of the big hit results, the round end command is set in step S724. The process when the round end command is set is the same as in step S713.

After that, in step S725, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so as to be subtracted by 1. In the following step S726, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S716. The processing after step S716 is as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S723 or an affirmative determination is made in step S726, the process proceeds to step S718. The processing after step S718 is as described above.

As the game state transition process, including the large winning opening opening / closing process, proceeds as in steps S501 to S513, the opening / closing execution mode according to the game result that triggered the transition is executed. In this case, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by any of the low-accuracy jackpot result A, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A, and the special deviation result, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is almost the same. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the open / close execution mode of pattern A).

Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by any of the low-accuracy jackpot result B, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning device 32 are substantially the same (hereinafter, patterns). B's open / close execution mode). In this case, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B has a longer duration of the opening / closing execution mode than the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, and the number of times of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 also increases.

Further, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the explicit high accuracy jackpot result C, the variable winning device 32 is controlled in an open / close pattern different from both the open / close execution mode of the pattern A and the open / close execution mode of the pattern B (hereinafter,). Also called the open / close execution mode of pattern C). Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by either the low probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is substantially the same (hereinafter, also referred to as the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D). In this case, the variable winning device 32 is controlled in an opening / closing execution mode different from that of the opening / closing execution modes of patterns A to C.

Here, the open / close execution mode of the pattern A, the open / close execution mode of the pattern B, and the open / close execution mode of the pattern C have a section in which the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is common from the start timing to the intermediate timing. Then, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is terminated as the common section is digested. On the other hand, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B and the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C continue even after the common section is digested. In this case, the continuation mode is different between the open / close execution mode of the pattern B and the open / close execution mode of the pattern C. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict which open / close execution mode is set at the start of the open / close execution mode while diversifying the open / close execution modes. Details of such effects will be described later.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 15), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S513, the process proceeds to step S514. In step S514, it is determined whether or not both the round counter RC and the open / close counter SOC are “0”. If either one is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If both are "0", it is determined in step S515 whether or not the timer counter T is "0". If the timer counter T is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. When the timer counter T is "0", the external output release process of the support mode is executed in step S516. The content of the external output release process will be described later. After that, in step S517, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated.

The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous jackpot result or any of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot results. When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94 in step S902, the flag is set, and if it is already set, that state is maintained. .. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

In the following step S903, if the number-of-times limit flag is set in the RAM 94, the number-of-times limit flag is cleared. If the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until the game result of the game times becomes one of the jackpot results. The flag.

In the following step S904, if the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, that state is maintained. As a result, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Further, this high-probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes one of the jackpot results. After that, in step S905, the external output setting process of the support mode is executed, and then the transition process is terminated. The external output setting process of this support mode will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is one of the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot results. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94.

If the high frequency support flag is set, the migration process ends after the processes of steps S903 to S905 already described have been executed. If the high-frequency support flag is not set, in step S908, if the high-probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, that state is maintained. To do. As a result, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Further, this high-probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes one of the jackpot results. After that, this migration process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S909 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is one of the low-accuracy jackpot results. .. If a negative determination is made in step S909, the main transition process is terminated as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S909, if the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S910, the high probability mode flag is cleared. As a result, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. Further, this low-probability mode is continued until at least the game result of the game times is the most advantageous result or one of the high-probability results.

In the following step S911, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is the low probability jackpot result C. In the case of the low probability jackpot result C, in step S912, if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, that state is maintained. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

After that, in step S913, "100" is set in the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. In the following step S914, if the number-of-times limit flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, that state is maintained. As a result, the high-frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times, which is the end reference number, and when 100 game times are exhausted, both the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared. And shift to low frequency support mode. Incidentally, although detailed description thereof will be omitted, the process is executed in the electric service support process in step S205 in the normal process (FIG. 12). After that, the external output setting process of the support mode is executed in step S915, and then the transition process is terminated. The external output setting process in the support mode will be described later.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S911, that is, if the low-accuracy jackpot result A or the low-accuracy jackpot result B, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S916, the main transition process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S916, the processes of steps S913 to S915 are executed, and then the main transition process is terminated. At the end of the transition process, the flag corresponding to the game result information set in the RAM 94 is cleared.

As described above, when the game result of the game round is the most advantageous jackpot result or one of the explicit high-probability jackpot results, the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the state at the time when the game round is performed) After the end of the round number regulation mode), the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are continued until at least the game result of the game times becomes the next big hit result. By the way, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

In addition, when the game result of the game round is any of the unspecified high-probability jackpot results, and the state at the time when the game round is performed is the high-frequency support mode, the open / close execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are continued until at least the game result of the game times is a jackpot result. By the way, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

On the other hand, when the state at the time when the game round is performed is the low frequency support mode, the game which is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) is completed. Move to the state. These high-probability modes and low-frequency support modes are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result. By the way, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, the image clearly indicating that the mode is high probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

Further, when the game result of the game round is a low probability jackpot result C, it is low after the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) regardless of the state at the time when the game round is performed. It shifts to the game state which is the probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low-probability mode is continued until at least the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result, and the high-frequency support mode digests 100 game times without the game result of the game times becoming the jackpot result. In case of transition to low frequency support mode. By the way, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the low probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

Further, when the game result of the game round is the low probability jackpot result A or the low probability jackpot result B, if the state at the time when the game round is performed is the high frequency support mode, the open / close execution mode After the end of (that is, the round number regulation mode), the game state shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low-probability mode is continued until at least the game result of the game times becomes the next big hit result, and the high-frequency support mode digests 100 game times without the game result of the game times becoming the big hit result. In case of transition to low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the state at the time when the game round is performed is the low-frequency support mode, the game is in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. Move to the state. These low-probability modes and low-frequency support modes are continued until at least the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result.

Incidentally, when the low-probability jackpot result A or the low-probability jackpot result B is obtained, an image indicating that the mode is in the low-probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 after the open / close execution mode. Further, the gaming state, which is not the opening / closing execution mode and is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, corresponds to the normal gaming state.

In addition, if the game result of the game round is any of the out-of-game results including the special out-of-game result, the transition between the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 72>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 102 in the voice emission control device 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect determination process is periodically (for example, at a 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 102.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command have been received. When these commands are received, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the mode lottery condition is satisfied.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of effect modes are set so that the effect contents selected in the effect for game rounds are different. Specifically, a low-expectation effect mode, a medium-expectation effect mode, a high-expectation effect mode, and a high-certainty-determined effect mode are set. The low-expectation production mode, the medium-expectation production mode, and the high-expectation production mode may be selected regardless of whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode. The mode. However, the selection rates are different from each other, and in the case of the low probability mode, the selection rate is set to be low expectation production mode> medium expectation production mode> high expectation production mode. In addition, in the case of the high probability mode, the selection rate is set so that the low expectation production mode <medium expectation production mode <high expectation production mode. Further, the high-probability determination effect mode is not selected in the low-probability mode, but is selected in the high-probability mode.

In each effect mode, the types of symbols that are variablely displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the effect for game rounds are the same, but the background image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 and the expected effect The type of character displayed on the display screen G at the time of execution and the content of the effect selected in the super reach display, which has a high expectation for the jackpot result among the reach displays, are set to be different. Further, since the speaker unit 59 outputs the sound effect according to the content of the display effect on the display screen G, it can be said that the sound output mode is different between the effect modes. However, the mode of difference between each effect mode is not limited to the above, and at least one of the background image, the type of character, the content of the selected effect, and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 59. It may be different, or other production contents may be different.

In addition, the mode lottery condition is satisfied when the effect mode transition occurrence occurrence lottery is won in the situation where the effect mode other than the highly accurate effect mode is set. The transition occurrence lottery is a transition occurrence winning when a loop counter that is periodically updated in the RAM 104 is used and the counter value acquired at the timing of step S1002 corresponds to the transition occurrence winning.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the mode lottery condition is satisfied, the effect mode lottery process is executed in step S1003. In the effect mode lottery process, a loop counter that is periodically updated in the RAM 104 is used, and the numerical information of the loop counter corresponds to a numerical range corresponding to a low expectation effect mode and a medium expectation effect mode. An effect lottery table assigned to either a numerical range or a numerical range corresponding to a high-expectation effect mode is used. In this case, the production lottery table is set corresponding to the case where the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the case where the production lottery mode is the high probability mode, and each production lottery table has a low expectation degree production mode. The selection rates of the medium-expected production mode and the high-expectation production mode are set to have the above relationship. However, each effect lottery table does not include the effect mode with high accuracy, and the effect mode with high accuracy is not subject to the lottery of the effect mode lottery process.

Although detailed description by illustration is omitted, information indicating which mode of the winning / failing lottery mode is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72 as a command, and the voice emission control device 72 Then, it is possible to grasp the current winning / failing lottery mode.

In step S1003, the effect lottery table corresponding to the current winning / failing lottery mode is read from the ROM 103, and the numerical information for the lottery is read from the loop counter of the RAM 104, and both are collated. Then, in step S1004, the effect mode corresponding to the collation result of step S1003 is set as the effect mode of the transition destination. The RAM 104 is provided with an effect mode counter whose counter value corresponds to each effect mode on a one-to-one basis, and the MPU 102 sets the effect mode by updating the counter value of the effect mode counter. At the same time, the current effect mode is grasped from the counter value of the effect mode counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002 or after the execution of step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C based on the content of the type command received in step S1001.

In the case of the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C, the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is executed in step S1006. In the symbol determination process, in the case of the most advantageous jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same odd number combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. To do. In this case, the types of odd-numbered symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the case of the low probability jackpot result C, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same even-numbered symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of even-numbered symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

If it is determined in step S1005 that neither the most advantageous jackpot result nor the low probability jackpot result C is obtained, the game result of the game times started this time is the most advantageous in step S1007 based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether the jackpot result and the low probability jackpot result C are other than the jackpot result or the special missed result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, a common symbol determination process is executed in step S1008. In the symbol determination process, a combination of common symbols predetermined on one effective line L1 to L5 (specifically) while preventing the same combination of symbols from being established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Determines the information corresponding to the stop result in which "3.4.1") is established as the information of the stop result this time. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of the common symbols is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like, but may be configured to be predetermined for a specific effective line.

If a negative determination is made in step S1007, a symbol determination process for normal deviation is executed in step S1009. In the symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the game times are related to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display based on the content of the change command, and if it is the game times related to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, one is valid. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on the lines L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the stop result this time. In this case, the type of combination of the out-of-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, a stop result is determined in which the same combination of symbols is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the common symbols is not stopped and displayed.

Further, if the game is not related to the occurrence of the off-reach display, the same combination of symbols is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the common symbols is stopped and displayed. The information corresponding to the stop result is determined as the information of the stop result this time, without further stopping and displaying the combination of the out-of-reach symbols.

In addition, in the symbol determination process for normal deviation, the stop result in which the combination of the common symbols is stopped and displayed may be selected.

After executing any of the processes of step S1006, step S1008, and step S1009, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 103, the effect duration (effect duration) corresponding to the variable command and the type command received this time is selected, and the effect is produced. Select the content. In this case, the production table is provided corresponding to each production mode, and in step S1010, the production duration is selected and the production is performed with reference to the production table corresponding to the current production mode. Select the content of. In addition, a lottery will be held to determine whether or not to display a notice. In the MPU 102, the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 58 in the current game round is executed and the output control of the speaker unit 59 is executed according to the effect pattern determined in step S1007.

In the following step S1011, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1006, step S1008 or step S1009 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1010 are transmitted to the display control device 111. The processing content of the display control device 111 due to the reception of these commands will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S1001 or after the process of step S1011 is executed, it is determined in step S1012 whether or not an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, in step S1013, the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode is executed.

The effect determination process for the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1101, based on the information contained in the opening command received this time, the game results that triggered the transmission of the command are the low-accuracy jackpot result A, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, and the special missed result. It is determined whether it is one of the above. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102.

In step S1102, the effect mode lottery process is executed. The processing content of the effect mode lottery process is the same as in the case of step S1003. However, whether to use the effect lottery table for the low probability mode or the high probability mode is selected according to the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, when the information contained in the opening command is the low probability jackpot result A, the production lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and when the information is the unspecified high probability jackpot result A, the effect is selected. Select the production lottery table for the high probability mode. In addition, in the case of a special deviation result, if the current winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the production lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and if the current winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability mode is selected. Select the production lottery table for.

After executing the process of step S1102, in step S1103, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of step S1102 is set as the effect mode of the transition destination. In the following step S1104, the effect A1 table is read out. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 58 in the current opening / closing execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 59 according to the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A1.

Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed triggered by any one of the low-accuracy jackpot result A, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, and the special deviation result is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A as described above, and its start. The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from to the end is generally common. The effect A1 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when proceeding in the opening / closing pattern. In addition, the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A1 may be subdivided so that the mode of light emission control and the mode of sound output control correspond to the lottery result of step S1102.

In the following step S1105, the effect A1 system command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A1 system command includes information indicating that the display effect corresponding to the effect A1 should be performed, and information corresponding to the lottery result in step S1102. The processing content of the display control device 111 due to the reception of the command will be described later. After executing the process of step S1105, the effect determination process for the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command based on the information included in the opening command received this time in step S1106 is the low probability jackpot result B. , It is determined whether it is an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B or an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the effect mode lottery process is executed. The processing content of the effect mode lottery process is the same as in the case of step S1003. However, whether to use the effect lottery table for the low probability mode or the high probability mode is selected according to the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, when the information contained in the opening command is the low probability jackpot result B, the production lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and the implicit high probability jackpot result B or the explicit high probability jackpot result B or the explicit high probability jackpot result. In the case of B, the effect lottery table for the high probability mode is selected.

After executing the process of step S1107, in step S1108, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of step S1107 is set as the effect mode of the transition destination. In the following step S1109, the effect A2 table is read out. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 58 in the current opening / closing execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 59 according to the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A2.

Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed triggered by any one of the low-accuracy jackpot result B, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B as described above. , The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end is generally common. The effect A2 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when proceeding in the opening / closing pattern. It should be noted that the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A2 may be subdivided so that the mode of light emission control and the mode of sound output control correspond to the lottery result of step S1107.

In the following step S1110, the effect A2 system command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A2 system command includes information indicating that the display effect corresponding to the effect A2 should be performed, and information corresponding to the lottery result in step S1107. The processing content of the display control device 111 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

In the following step S1111, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, it is determined whether the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B. If it is not the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, the effect determination process for the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated as it is, and if it is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, the effect mode correction process is executed in step S1112. After that, the effect determination process for the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

In the effect mode modification process, a process of modifying the effect mode setting from the effect mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process in step S1107 to the highly accurate effect mode is executed. As a result, when the effect for the game round is started after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the effect for the game round is not the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result in step S1107, but the effect mode with high accuracy confirmation. It is done in. That is, when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is obtained, the effect in the open / close execution mode is the case of the low-accuracy jackpot result B in which the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is common and the case of the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B. The same effect A2 as in is selected, but after the open / close execution mode, a highly accurate effect is performed unlike the case of the low accuracy jackpot result B and the case of the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result B.

If a negative determination is made in step S1106, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result based on the information contained in the opening command received this time in step S1113. Determine if it is A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1113, the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1114, the effect mode setting process is executed. In the effect mode setting process, the effect mode with high accuracy is set as the effect mode of the transition destination. In the following step S1115, the effect A3 table is read out. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 58 in the opening / closing execution mode this time and also executes the output control of the speaker unit 59 according to the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A3.

Here, the open / close execution mode executed with the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A as a trigger is the open / close execution mode of the pattern A as described above, and the open / close pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end is low. It is common to the open / close execution mode triggered by any of the probability jackpot result A, the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A, and the special deviation result. The effect A3 is set according to the duration of the open / close execution mode when the process proceeds in the opening / closing pattern, but the content of the effect is different from that of the effect A1.

In the following step S1116, the effect A3 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A3 command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A3 should be performed. Since the transition destination of the effect mode when the effect A3 is selected is fixed to the effect mode with high accuracy as described above, the effect A3 command contains dedicated information for individually specifying the effect mode. Is not included. After executing the process of step S1116, the effect determination process for the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1113, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result based on the information included in the opening command received this time in step S1117. Determine if it is C. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1117, the process proceeds to step S1118.

In step S1118, the effect mode setting process is executed. In the effect mode setting process, the effect mode with high accuracy is set as the effect mode of the transition destination. In the following step S1119, the effect A4 table is read out. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 58 in the current opening / closing execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 59 according to the effect pattern corresponding to the effect A4. Here, the open / close execution mode executed triggered by the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C is the open / close execution mode of the pattern C as described above. The effect A3 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when proceeding in the opening / closing pattern.

In the following step S1120, the effect A4 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A4 command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A4 should be performed. After executing the process of step S1120, the effect determination process for the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1117, it means that the game result that triggered the transmission of the opening command is either the low probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, so the process proceeds to step S1121. ..

In step S1121, the effect mode setting process is executed. In the effect mode setting process, when the game result that triggered the above is the low probability jackpot result C, the effect mode with a low expectation is set as the effect mode of the transition destination, and the game result that triggered the above is If it is the most advantageous jackpot result, the effect mode with high accuracy is set as the effect mode of the transition destination. In the following step S1122, the effect B table is read out. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 58 in the opening / closing execution mode this time and also executes the output control of the speaker unit 59 according to the effect pattern corresponding to the effect B. Here, the open / close execution mode executed by either the low probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result is the open / close execution mode of the pattern D as described above. The effect B is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when proceeding in the opening / closing pattern.

In the following step S1123, the effect B command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect B command includes information indicating that the display effect corresponding to the effect B should be performed. After executing the process of step S1123, the effect determination process for the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process (FIG. 20), when a negative determination is made in step S1012 or after the process of step S1013 is executed, it is determined in step S1014 whether or not a premium command is received. As described above, the premium command is transmitted when a prize is generated in the large winning opening 32a in the situation where the opening mode of the variable winning device 32 is the short-time mode in the 1st round of the round number regulation mode. ..

When the premium command is received, the determination process of the premium effect is executed in step S1015. In the MPU 102, the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 are executed so that the premium effect is performed in the middle of the round number regulation mode this time.

In the following step S1016, the premium effect command is transmitted to the display control device 111. The MPU 113 of the display control device 111 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the premium effect is performed in the middle of the round number regulation mode this time. For example, a special character that does not appear in the effect for the normal opening / closing execution mode is displayed, or a special moving image is displayed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1014 or after the process of step S1016 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1017. In other processes, for example, based on the reception of the round start command, the round end command, and the ending command, a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed. However, the process for advancing the production based on the reception of the round start command and the round end command is not executed in the round game in which the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the short-time mode, and the large winning in the long-time mode is performed. It is executed in a round game in which the mouth 32a is opened and closed. After that, the production determination process is completed.

<About V interrupt processing executed by the display control device 111>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 113 in the display control device 111 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is periodically (for example, at a 20 msec cycle) started by the MPU 113.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received. If a new command has been received, the data table selection process is executed in step S1202. The data table is an information group in which processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing is defined when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Is.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, or after the process of step S1202 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, the pointer update process is executed. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the MPU 113 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

In the following step S1204, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time, grasp the type of image data necessary for giving a drawing instruction to VDP116, and grasp the parameters applied to the grasped image data. Perform the calculation.

After that, the drawing list output process is executed in step S1205, and then the V interrupt process is terminated. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing related to this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 116. In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target in the video RAM 118, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 116 reads necessary image data from the character ROM 117 according to this drawing list, and sets the frame buffer of the video RAM 118 with the above parameters applied to the read image data. As a result, drawing data for one frame is created. Then, the image signal is output to the symbol display device 41 according to the created drawing data, so that an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

Here, the commands received by the MPU 113 of the display control device 111 from the voice emission control device 72 include a stop result command and a pattern command. When these commands are received, in step S1202, a data table necessary for executing the game rotation effect corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 41 is selected. In this case, the moving image of the game rounding effect is displayed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72, and the display content corresponds to the current effect mode. Further, in the moving image of the game rotation effect, the stop result determined by the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 is finally stopped and displayed.

When the common symbol determination process is executed in the MPU 102, the timing at which the common symbol combination is displayed is limited to the timing at which the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in the game rounding effect. It is not necessary and is arbitrary. For example, a common symbol combination may be displayed in the middle of the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and a common symbol combination may be displayed in the middle of the reach display. May be displayed, or the combination of common symbols may be displayed after the indication that the deviation has occurred is performed in the reach display, and the combination of the symbols that are normally out of alignment is stopped and displayed. After that, a combination of common symbols may be displayed.

Further, as the above-mentioned received command, there is a command for opening / closing execution mode. When the command is received, in step S1202, the data table required for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the command on the symbol display device 41 is selected. Specifically, as described above, the commands for the open / close execution mode include the effect A1 system command, the effect A2 system command, the effect A3 command, the effect A4 command, and the effect B command. Select the data table corresponding to each of these commands. Further, since the effect A1 system command and the effect A2 system command include information corresponding to the lottery result of the effect mode lottery process (step S1102 or step S1107), the data table of the effect A1 system and the effect A2 system As the data table, the data table corresponding to each lottery result is selected.

The data table of the effect A1, the data table of the effect A2, and the data table of the effect A3 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 23. 23 (a) shows the data table of the effect A1, FIG. 23 (b) shows the data table of the effect A2, and FIG. 23 (c) shows the data table of the effect A3.

As shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c), each data table contains information on the number of frames, which is information indicating the number of frames since the effect for the open / close execution mode is started. The information of the usage data group used in each frame is set in a one-to-one correspondence. In this case, as already described, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A in which the effect A1 or the effect A3 is selected and the open / close execution mode of the pattern B in which the effect A2 is selected are start timings. There is a section in which the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is common from to the timing in the middle. Further, in the common section, the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a is a short-time mode in which the winning of the game balls does not substantially occur or the winning of the maximum number of game balls does not substantially occur. The time required for this does not change depending on the winning situation of the large winning opening 32a. Corresponding to the existence of the common section, the effects are standardized in the data tables of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c).

That is, the same usage data group is set for the number of frames F (1) to F (q-x-1), and as shown in FIG. 23 (A), the low expectation production mode and medium expectation An effect that predicts whether to shift to the effect mode of degree or the effect mode of high expectation is performed. Further, the same usage data group is set in the subsequent number of frames F (qx) to F (q-y-1), and as shown in FIG. 23B, each of the above-mentioned effect modes is set. The production is performed as if the transition destination was decided in one of the above. In this case, in the effect A1 and the effect A2, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the effect mode lottery process (step S1102 or step S1107) is displayed as the transition destination. Further, in the effect A3, the effect mode with high expectation is displayed as the transition destination. The number of frames F (1) to F (q-y-1) corresponds to the common effect, and the timing at which the common effect ends is the end timing of the common section.

The timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which the common effect ends may be before or after the end timing of the common section. However, in linking the common section according to the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 and the common effect according to the display mode of the symbol display device 41, the period during which both are performed should be overlapped to the extent that the player can recognize that they are the same. Is preferable.

On the other hand, after the number of frames F (q-y), images corresponding to each effect are displayed. That is, in the effect A1, the effect in which the transition destination is determined is performed until the final frame F (q).

Further, in the effect A2, in the number of frames F (q-y) to F (q), as shown in FIG. 23C, an effect indicating that a further effect is developed in the opening / closing execution mode is provided. After that, as shown in FIG. 23D, an effect indicating that the pattern B is in the open / close execution mode is performed. After that, a predetermined effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is performed until the final frame F (r).

Further, in the effect A3, in the number of frames F (q-y) to F (q), as shown in FIG. 23C, an effect indicating that a further effect is developed in the opening / closing execution mode is provided. After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (E), it is shown that the game result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the explicit high-probability jackpot result A, or whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is performed. An effect indicating that the lottery mode is a high probability mode is performed.

By the way, the data table of the effect A4 is set so that the same effect as in the case of the effect A2 is performed up to the number of frames F (1) to F (q), but the subsequent effect is the effect A2. It is set so that the production is different from the case of. Further, in the data table of the effect B, the above-mentioned common effect is not set, and an effect different from any of the effects A1 to A4 is performed.

<About the content of the game result>
Next, the contents of various game results defined by executing the above various processes will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

As shown in FIG. 24, the gaming results set in the pachinko machine 10 other than the normal off-target results are low-accuracy jackpot result A, low-accuracy jackpot result B, low-accuracy jackpot result C, and unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A. , Unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B, explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A, explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C, most advantageous jackpot result and special off-target result.

Among these game results, the various jackpot results are the game results selected when the winner is won in the winning / losing lottery, and the special loss result is the game result selected when the winning / losing lottery is not won. In addition, the various jackpot results are different from the special loss results, and are game results that trigger a transition for either the winning / losing lottery mode or the support mode, but the transition modes are different as shown in FIG. 24. ..

Each of the game results listed in FIG. 24 triggers a shift to the open / close execution mode, but the contents of the open / close execution mode of the shift destination are different in a predetermined combination or individually. The contents of each of these open / close execution modes will be described below with reference to FIG. 25 in addition to FIG. FIG. 25 is a timing chart for explaining the contents of each opening / closing execution mode. Note that FIG. 25 shows a case where the maximum number of game balls is not won in the large winning opening 32a in each round game in the round number specified mode.

First, a case where the open / close execution mode of the pattern D is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the open / close execution mode of the pattern D, which shifts with either the low probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result as an opportunity, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times. However, in each round game, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed once according to the long-term mode. As a result, the player can receive a large amount of game balls to be paid out.

Next, a case where the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is executed will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (a), in the low-accuracy jackpot result A, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A, a round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times. In each round game, the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed once in a short time mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, in the special deviation result, the mode shifts to the open / close number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed 15 times in a short time mode.

That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed only in a short time mode, the number of times is 15 times, and the total number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 32a is 15 times. By opening and closing the large winning opening 32a only in a short time mode in this way, even if the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is entered, the payout of the game ball to the player does not substantially occur. Therefore, the open / close execution mode can be executed as a kind of effect that does not substantially increase the player's ball output.

In the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, not only the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 32a, but also the waiting time for the opening, the time between continuous opening / closing operations, and the waiting time for the ending are the same. Therefore, when the mode A is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the operation of the variable winning device 32 is apparently the same regardless of the game result that triggered the transition, and any game is performed from the operation of the variable winning device 32. The player cannot grasp whether the result was an opportunity.

By the way, this pachinko machine 10 is not provided with a dedicated display unit indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the round number specified mode, and the upper limit number of rounds in the round number specified mode is all the same. There is no dedicated display unit that indicates the number of times that is performed. Therefore, even if it is attempted to grasp which of the round number regulation mode and the opening / closing number regulation mode is based on the dedicated display unit, it is impossible.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (A), the symbol display device 41 has a symbol display device 41 in a game that is one of a low-accuracy jackpot result A, an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A, and a special deviation result. A combination of common symbols is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (B) to 25 (C), the effect of the open / close execution mode from the start timing of the open / close execution mode to at least an intermediate timing is produced. Is also common. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is executed, which game result is the trigger even if the effect including the display contents of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed at least until the intermediate timing. I can't figure out. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is executed, the player can play the game while predicting which game result is the trigger. In addition, in FIG. 25, the effect as shown in FIG. 25 (B) is performed until the timing of t1, and the effect as shown in FIG. 25 (C) is performed from the timing of t1.

If the low-accuracy jackpot result A, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, and the special missed result trigger the transition, the support mode up to that point is continued. Furthermore, when these game results trigger a transition, the effects in the open / close execution mode are common from the start timing to the end timing of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, when the low-probability jackpot result A, the unspecified high-probability jackpot result A, and the special missed result trigger the transition, the player is set to either the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode. The game can be played while predicting the probability, and the degree of attention of the game after the open / close execution mode can be improved.

On the other hand, when the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A is obtained, the high frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode up to that point. Therefore, for example, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is executed due to the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A in the low frequency support mode, the player shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. Can recognize that the game result that triggered the transition is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A.

In response to such a situation, when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained, FIG. 25 shows from the timing of t2 when the last opening / closing in the opening / closing execution mode is completed until the waiting time for the ending elapses. The final effect as shown in (D) and FIG. 25 (E) is performed. As a result, when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained, the player is made to predict which game result was the trigger until the middle of the open / close execution mode, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is started from the middle. It is possible to teach that. Further, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is performed, the player plays the game while expecting that the above-mentioned final effect is performed, and the attention of the game in the open / close execution mode can be improved. it can. Furthermore, since the timing at which the final effect is started is the timing at which the final opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 ends, it is possible to know which game result was the trigger from the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. It is possible to achieve the effect of performing the above-mentioned final effect without losing the effect of doing.

Next, a case where the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is executed will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (b), in the low-accuracy jackpot result B, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B, a round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times. In the 1st and 2nd round games that are continuous from the start timing, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed 16 times in total in a short time mode. That is, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game. In other words, in one round game, the phenomenon that the big winning opening 32a changes from the open state to the closed state and then changes to the open state again occurs at least once. By the way, when the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game as described above, the upper limit duration which is one end condition of the round game is the opening duration in each short time mode and the opening duration. It is about the same as or slightly longer than the sum of the waiting times between a plurality of consecutive openings and closings. Further, in each round game from the 3rd round to the 15th round, the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed once according to the long-time mode.

That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, the large winning opening 32a is first opened / closed 16 times in the short-time mode, and then the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed 13 times in the long-time mode. The total number of times the winning opening 32a is opened and closed is 29 times. As a result, in the open / close execution mode of the pattern B, the payout of the game ball to the player does not substantially occur from the start timing to the intermediate timing, but after the intermediate timing, a large amount of the game ball is paid to the player. Payout occurs. However, the payout amount of the game ball expected to be acquired in the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is smaller than that in the open / close execution mode of the pattern D.

In the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B, not only the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 32a, but also the waiting time for the opening, the time between continuous opening / closing operations, and the waiting time for the ending are the same among the game results that trigger the transition. It has become. Therefore, when the mode B is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the operation of the variable winning device 32 is apparently the same regardless of the game result that triggered the transition, and any game is performed from the operation of the variable winning device 32. The player cannot grasp whether the result was an opportunity.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (A), a symbol common to the symbol display device 41 is used in the game times in which one of the low-accuracy jackpot result B, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B. Along with the stop display of the combination, the effect in the open / close execution mode from the start timing to the end timing of the open / close execution mode is also common. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is executed, even if the effect including the display contents of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed, which game result is the trigger is grasped during the open / close execution mode. Can not do it. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is executed, the player can play the game while predicting which game result is the trigger.

As shown in FIG. 24, when either the low-accuracy jackpot result B or the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B triggers the transition, the grand prize opening 32a in the short-time mode is used in each of the 1st and 2nd rounds. When the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B triggers the transition, the opening of the big winning opening 32a is done 15 times in the 1st round and the big winning in the 2nd round. The opening of the mouth 32a is performed once. That is, the number of times of opening and closing in the short-time mode continuous from the start timing is the same, but the number of times of opening and closing in the short-time mode assigned to the first round game is the case of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B. Is increasing.

As described above, when the large winning opening 32a is won in the first round of the round number regulation mode and the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a is a short time mode, the premium effect is executed. In this configuration, by making the number of times of opening and closing of the big winning opening 32a in the first round game different as described above, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high probability big hit result B is the low probability big hit result B and the non-high probability big hit result B. It is possible to increase the probability that the premium effect will be executed as compared with the open / close execution mode in which any of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot results B is the trigger for execution. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern B occurs, it is unclear which jackpot result is the trigger from the mode of the effect for the open / close execution mode excluding the premium effect and the mode of the grand prize opening 32a. When the premium production is performed, it is possible to predict that the possibility of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is relatively high. Furthermore, in the short-time mode from the start timing to the 8th time, no prize is given to the large winning opening 32a, and in the short-time mode after the 9th time, a prize is generated in the large winning opening 32a. The player who confirms that the effect has been performed can recognize that the currently executed open / close execution mode is triggered by the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B.

If either the low-accuracy jackpot result B or the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B triggers the transition, the support mode up to that point is continued. Therefore, when either the low-probability jackpot result B or the unspecified high-probability jackpot result B triggers the transition, the player decides whether the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode. The game can be played while predicting the probability, and the degree of attention of the game after the open / close execution mode can be improved.

Next, a case where the open / close execution mode of the pattern C is executed will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (c), in the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C, the mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and in the first round game, the short-time mode. After the opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a 18 times is performed, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed once according to the medium time mode. That is, not only the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game, but also the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in different types of opening modes during one round game. By the way, when the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game as described above, the upper limit duration which is one end condition of the round game is the opening duration in each short time mode and the opening duration. It is about the same as or slightly longer than the sum time of the opening duration in the medium-time mode and the waiting time between a plurality of continuous openings and closings. Further, in each round game from the 2nd round to the 15th round, the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed once according to the long-time mode.

That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, the large winning opening 32a is first opened / closed 18 times in the short-time mode, and then the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed once in the medium-time mode. After that, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed 14 times in a long-time mode, so that the total number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed is 33 times. As a result, in the open / close execution mode of the pattern C, the payout of the game ball to the player does not substantially occur from the start timing to the intermediate timing, but after the intermediate timing, a large amount of the game ball is paid to the player. Payout occurs. The payout amount of the game ball expected to be acquired in this case is the same as in the case of the open / close execution mode of the pattern D.

Next, a comparison of open / close execution modes of patterns A to C will be described.

In both the case where the open / close execution mode of pattern A is executed and the case where the open / close execution mode of pattern B is executed, the high probability mode may be set as the winning / failing lottery mode, and the low probability mode is set. There are times. However, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the pattern is more than the probability that the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A are selected among the various game results that trigger the open / close execution mode of the pattern A. The probability that either the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B or the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is selected from the various game results that trigger the opening / closing execution mode of B is set high. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the winning / failing lottery mode becomes a higher probability mode than when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed. ..

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), in both the case of pattern A, the case of pattern B, and the case of pattern C, the large winning opening 32a in a short time mode from the start timing. Opening and closing is performed 15 times in a row. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), the combination of common symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the game times that are the game results corresponding to the patterns A to C, and FIG. 25 (B). )-As shown in FIG. 25C, the effect in the opening / closing execution mode is also common from the start timing until the opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in a short time mode is performed 15 times. As a result, when the opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a is started in a short time mode, the player predicts which of the patterns A to C the opening / closing execution mode is from the start timing to the intermediate timing. You can play while playing.

Further, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, after the opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is continuously performed 15 times from the start timing and the common section is completed, the large winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is further opened / closed. It opens and closes once. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, after the opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the short time mode is continuously performed 15 times from the start timing and the common section is completed, the large winning opening 32a in the short time mode is further opened / closed. It is opened and closed three times. As a result, the player can grasp which of the open / close execution modes of patterns A to C is performed by counting the number of times of opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in a short time mode from the start timing. .. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the open / close execution mode of the pattern B and the pattern C, as shown in FIGS. 25 (D) and 25 (F), from the timing of t2 when the last open / close related to the common section with the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is completed. Pattern B and pattern C are finalized. As a result, when either the open / close execution mode of the pattern B or the pattern C is set, the player is made to predict which open / close execution mode is from the start timing of the open / close execution mode until the common section elapses. From the middle, it is possible to teach that the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B or the pattern C is set. Further, in the common section, the player plays the game while expecting that the above-mentioned final effect is performed, and the degree of attention of the game in the open / close execution mode can be improved. Furthermore, since the timing at which the final effect is started is the timing at which the final opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 ends, it is difficult to tell which opening / closing execution mode is from the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. It is possible to achieve the effect of performing the above-mentioned final effect without losing the effect.

By the way, in the open / close execution mode of pattern B, the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed a plurality of times during one round game, so that the maximum number of round games is the same, and the game continues from the start timing. While the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a is the same as that of the pattern A and the case of the pattern B, the large winning opening 32a can be opened and closed in the pattern B for a long time after the common opening mode.

Further, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed a plurality of times during one round game, and after the opening / closing in the short-time mode is completed, the opening / closing is switched to the medium-time mode. As a result, in the configuration in which the upper limit of the number of round games is the same, the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a continuous from the start timing is the same as that in the cases of patterns A to B, but after the common opening mode. It is possible to win a maximum number of game balls during the same round game.

<About external output from pachinko machine 10 to hall computer HC>
Next, the configuration of the external output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 26 is a schematic view for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed.

As shown in FIG. 26, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed on the island facility S. Further, in the island facility S, a data counter DC is installed so as to correspond one-to-one with each pachinko machine 10. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, and has a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times the game has been executed and a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times the predetermined opening / closing execution mode has been executed. 2 Display unit DC2 is provided.

A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as a management control means for managing each pachinko machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and the MPU 201 is mounted therein. In the MPU 201, a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202, information input from the pachinko machine 10 and the like are temporarily stored in the MPU 201. It is provided with a RAM 203, which is a memory for storing the data.

The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL1 and is electrically connected to each data counter DC through the electric wiring group EL2. Then, the management process based on the information received from each pachinko machine 10 is executed, and the signal corresponding to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

Here, the configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 27. 27 (a) is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in which the external terminal plate 81 and its surroundings are enlarged, and FIG. 27 (b) illustrates the external output buffer 94d provided in the RAM 94 of the main control device 71. 27 (c) is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the external terminal board 81.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the external terminal plate 81 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals) 81a to 81h. A total of eight external terminals 81a to 81h are provided, and the types of information output externally to the hall computer HC are different.

The jackpot external terminal 81a is used to output information (winning information or winning signal) indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress based on the jackpot winning in the winning / losing lottery of the main control device 71. Information indicating that the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode is in the open / close execution mode based on the fact that the main control device 71 has won a big hit or a special loss result (open / close execution information or open / close). It is used to output the execution signal). The external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is in the opening / closing execution mode of any of patterns B to D, or the jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery, and the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is changed to the high frequency support mode after the end. It is used to output information (conditional winning information or conditional winning signal) indicating that the set open / close execution mode is in progress.

The external terminal 81a for the jackpot, the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot are all used to output information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress. The conditions for outputting are different.

In particular, the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is triggered by the opening / closing execution mode in which the ball is substantially ejected to the player, or the jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is set as the above condition. Therefore, the information is not output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot during the open / close execution mode triggered by the special loss result, and the low-accuracy jackpot result A in the low-frequency support mode. Alternatively, information is not output from the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot even during the open / close execution mode triggered by the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A. As a result, when it is possible for the player to recognize that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is different from the one triggered by the special deviation result, the information is output externally and the special deviation result is used as an opportunity. When it is impossible to recognize that the information is different from the one, it is possible to provide the game hall with a terminal that does not output information to the outside.

In addition to the above-mentioned external terminals 81a to 81c, the external terminals 81a to 81h include an external terminal 81d for the support mode used for outputting information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode. External terminal 81e for the number of games used to output information indicating that the game times have been completed, and an external terminal used to output information indicating that a prize has been generated to the operating ports 33 and 34. It is used to output 81f, an external terminal 81g used to output information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out, and information indicating that a predetermined fraud has been detected. The external terminal 81h and the like are included. The types of the external terminals 81a to 81h are not limited to those described above. For example, the external terminals used to output information indicating that the game machine main body 12 is open, and the front door frame 14 An external terminal used to output information indicating that the door is open may be provided.

The external output buffer 94d of the RAM 94 of the main control device 71 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 121 to 128 for setting output so as to correspond one-to-one with the external terminals 81a to 81h. The unit areas 121 to 128 for each output setting have a predetermined bit, specifically 1 bit of information amount, and each unit area 121 to 128 has "0" which is information without output and has output. Any information of "1" which is information is set. The amount of information in each unit area 121 to 128 is not limited to one bit and is arbitrary, and the data structure of the information without output and the information with output is also arbitrary.

The main control device 71 is electrically connected to each of the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal plate 81 in a one-to-one correspondence through the electrical wiring group EL3 shown in FIG. 27A, and is electrically connected to the external output buffer 94d. A signal of a predetermined voltage is output to the external terminals 81a to 81h corresponding to the unit areas 121 to 128 in which "1" is set.

As shown in FIG. 27C, each of the external terminals 81a to 81h enables transmission of an electric signal from the main control device 71 to the hall computer HC, while preventing the reverse flow of the photocoupler 131. It is composed of. The light emitting diode 132 on the primary side of the photocoupler 131 is connected to the main control device 71 via a resistor 133, and the light receiving element (phototransistor) 134 on the secondary side is connected to the hall computer HC. Therefore, when a signal is output from the main controller 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81h corresponding to the unit areas 121 to 128 in which "1" is set in the external output buffer 94d, the external output is made. The light emitting diodes 132 of the terminals 81a to 81h emit light, and the light is received by the light receiving element 134 of the external terminals 81a to 81h and converted into an electric signal, and the electric signal is output to the hall computer HC.

The mode of the electric signal output to the hall computer HC is arbitrary, and in a situation where the main control device 71 does not output an external signal, a 0V signal is output, and the external output causes a predetermined value larger than 0V. The signal of the voltage of the above may be output, or the output pattern of the signal may have the opposite relationship. Further, in a situation where no external output is made from the main control device 71, a signal having a reference voltage larger than 0V is output, and when an external output is made, a signal having a voltage larger or lower than the reference voltage is output. May be.

<Processing related to external output executed by the main controller 71>
Next, the processing related to the external output executed by the main control device 71 will be described. However, in the following description, among the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal plate 81, the external terminal 81a for the jackpot, the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot, and the support mode The configuration related to the external output through the external terminal 81d will be mainly described.

The process for starting the external output through the external terminal 81a for the jackpot, the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is included in the game state transition process (FIG. 15) already described. Specifically, it is an external output setting process at the time of mode transition in step S511 and an external output setting process for delay in step S512. The execution timings of these two external output setting processes are different, the external output setting process at the time of mode transition in step S511 is executed when the open / close execution mode is started, and the external output setting process for delay in step S512 is opened / closed. It is repeatedly executed after the start of the execution mode.

<External output setting processing at the time of mode transition>
First, the external output setting process at the time of mode transition will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is one of the big hit results. If any of the jackpot results is obtained, in step S1302, "1" is set in the first unit area 121 corresponding to the external terminal 81a for jackpot in the external output buffer 94d, and the external for open / close execution mode is set. “1” is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the terminal 81b. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot and the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode is started, and each terminal 81a, The information associated with the 81b can be output to the hall computer HC.

On the other hand, if neither of the jackpot results is obtained, that is, if the special deviation result is a trigger, "1" is set only in the second unit area 122 in step S1303. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output directed to the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81b is halled. It becomes possible to perform it for the computer HC.

After executing the process of step S1302 or step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, after setting "1" in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the external output buffer 94d in step S1305, this external output End the setting process. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output directed to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81c is halled. It becomes possible to perform it for the computer HC.

If a negative determination is made in step S1304, in step S1306, the game results that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time are the low-accuracy jackpot result B, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A. , It is determined whether the result is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B or the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the output delay flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S1307, and "12950" is set in the delay timer counter DT provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. After that, the external output setting process is terminated.

The output delay flag is information for the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 to recognize that the start of the external output through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is delayed. Further, the delay timer counter DT is a counter for the MPU 92 to grasp at what timing the start of the external output through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is delayed. Since the numerical information set in the delay timer counter DT is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started, the delay time (delay period) set in step S1307 is performed. Is 25.9 sec. This time is the same as or substantially the same as the time required from the start timing to the end of the common section in the open / close execution modes of patterns A to C. The effects of this will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1306, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation result. If the result is a special deviation, the external output setting process is terminated as it is. If it is not a special deviation result, that is, if it is a low-accuracy jackpot result A or an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. , It is determined whether or not the game result is a trigger for the opening / closing execution mode in the situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the external output setting process is terminated after executing the process of step S1307 already described, and if a negative determination is made in step S1309, the external output setting process is performed as it is. To finish.

<External output setting process for delay>
Next, the external output setting process for delay will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the output delay flag is set in the RAM 94. If the output delay flag is not set, this external output setting process ends as it is. If the output delay flag is set, in step S1402, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the delay timer counter DT is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the delay time has elapsed. If the delay timer counter DT is not "0", the external output setting process is terminated as it is. If the delay timer counter DT is "0", the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, “1” is set in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output directed to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81c is halled. It becomes possible to perform it for the computer HC. Then, in step S1404, after clearing the output delay flag set in the RAM 94, the external output setting process ends.

<External output release processing>
Next, the external output release process executed in step S413 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14) will be described.

In the external output release process, the process of setting the information of the first unit area 121 to the third unit area 123 in the external output buffer 94d to "0" is executed. As a result, when the signal is output to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot, when the signal is output to the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is output. When the signal is output, the signal output is stopped in the external output process (step S201) of the next normal process (FIG. 12).

Here, the external output release process is executed in the variation start process (FIG. 14) as described above, and the variation start process is executed when a new game round is started. That is, in the state where the signal is output to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot, the state where the signal is output to the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. The state in which the directed signal is output is not released at the end of the corresponding open / close execution mode, but is released when the first game round is started after the open / close execution mode. By canceling as described above, it is possible to secure a long signal output period from each of the external terminals 81a to 81c. Further, since it is released when the first game round is started, the signal output period can be secured within a range in which there is no problem in managing the pachinko machine 10.

The release timing is not limited to the above, and may be released at the end of the open / close execution mode, for example, before or after a predetermined period based on the end timing of the open / close execution mode. It may be configured to be released.

<Support mode external output setting process>
Next, the external output setting process of the support mode executed in step S905 and step S915 of the transition process (FIG. 19) at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described.

In the external output setting process of the support mode, the process of setting the information of the fourth unit area 124 in the external output buffer 94d to "1" is executed. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output directed to the external terminal 81d for the support mode is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81d is output to the hall computer. It becomes possible to perform for HC. In this case, the timing at which the external output setting process for the support mode is executed is the timing at which the open / close execution mode ends.

Further, the state in which "1" is set in the fourth unit area 124 is released by the external output release process (step S516) of the support mode in the game state transition process (FIG. 15). In the external output release process, when the game result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is one of the big hit results, the state in which "1" is set in the fourth unit area 124 is released, and a special If the result is out of order, the cancellation will not be performed. As a result, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode based on any of the jackpot results, the signal output directed to the external terminal 81d for the port mode is stopped when the open / close execution mode ends. However, since the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode of step S517 is executed immediately after step S516, when the high frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode, the external terminal 81d for the support mode is immediately directed. Signal output is started.

In addition to the above case, the state in which "1" is set in the fourth unit area 124 is a case where the high frequency support mode is continued for 100 game times and then the low frequency support mode is entered. Is also released.

By the way, the external output setting process for the number of games is executed in step S310 of the game times control process (FIG. 13). In the external output setting process for the number of games, the process of setting the information of the fifth unit area 125 in the external output buffer 94d to "1" is executed. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output directed to the external terminal 81e for the number of games is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81e is output to the hall computer. It becomes possible to perform for HC. In this case, the timing at which the external output setting process for the number of games is executed is the timing at which the game ends. Further, the state in which "1" is set in the fifth unit area 125 is released by the external output release process in step S413.

<Processing related to external output executed by Hall Computer HC>
Next, the processing executed by the hall computer HC in response to the external output from the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

As described above, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL1. More specifically about such an electrical connection, as shown in FIG. 26, the electrical wiring group EL1 has six electrical wirings individually. On the other hand, the external terminal plate 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with eight external terminals 81a to 81h as shown in FIG. 27 (a). That is, the number of signal paths between one pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer HC is smaller than the number of external terminals 81a to 81h provided in the pachinko machine 10.

In this case, the external terminal 81a for the jackpot, the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot are partially externally output for performing external output during the open / close execution mode. Although overlapping, the other external terminals 81d to 81h are independent without any correlation with the contents of the external output. Therefore, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is introduced without modifying the conventional equipment, one of the external terminal 81a for the jackpot, the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is used. It is considered that the electrical connection is made by selecting. Further, even in a game hall where the same number of signal paths as the number of external terminals 81a to 81h can be provided by modifying the conventional equipment, the data counter DC displays the number of executions of the predetermined opening / closing execution mode. It is necessary to select a terminal for reflecting information on the second display unit DC2 from the external terminal 81a for jackpot, the external terminal 81b for open / close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot. However, regardless of which terminal is selected, the same management process is executed in the hall computer HC.

The management process executed by the hall computer HC will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is periodically started at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec.

First, in step S1501, the managed target counter provided in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC is updated. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is changed from the previous time. In the following step S1502, it is determined whether or not reception of the opening / closing execution mode signal has been started from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. In this case, among the electrical wiring group EL1 of the hall computer HC, the electrical wiring connected to any of the external terminal 81a for the jackpot, the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is predetermined. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not reception of a signal is started through the electrical wiring.

If the "signal reception" always rises from LOW to HI, it is sufficient to determine whether or not this signal rise has occurred, and the "signal reception" always rises from HI to LOW. In the case of falling, it may be determined whether or not the falling of this signal has occurred.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, information on the date and time when the opening / closing execution mode signal reception of the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is started is stored in the RAM 203 in step S1503. In the following step S1504, the control start process of the second display unit is executed. Specifically, the second display unit DC2 is displayed and controlled so that the number of times information of the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is added by 1, and after the addition. By blinking and displaying the number of times information of, the player and the manager of the game hall are notified that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress.

The mode of the notification is arbitrary. For example, when the data counter DC is provided with a light emitting unit other than the first display unit DC1 and the second display unit DC2, the light emitting unit is put into a light emitting state or a blinking state. It may be configured as. Further, for example, in addition to or in place of the data counter DC, a voice output unit may be provided to perform notification by voice output.

If a negative determination is made in step S1502 or after the process of step S1504 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has finished receiving the open / close execution mode signal. If the "signal reception" is to constantly rise from LOW to HI, it is determined whether or not the reception of the open / close execution mode signal has been completed based on whether or not a fall from HI to LOW has occurred. If the "signal reception" is always falling from HI to LOW, whether or not the reception of the open / close execution mode signal is finished depends on whether or not a rise from LOW to HI has occurred. Should be determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, information on the date and time when the reception of the open / close execution mode signal for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is finished is stored in the RAM 203 in step S1506. In the following step S1507, the control end processing of the second display unit is executed. Specifically, the display control of the second display unit DC2 is performed so that the number of times information is continuously displayed in a state where the blinking display of the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is finished. To do.

If a negative determination is made in step S1505 or after the process of step S1507 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has started receiving the support mode signal. In this case, it is determined whether or not the signal reception is started through the electric wiring connected to the external terminal 81d for the support mode in the electric wiring group EL1 of the hall computer HC.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1508, information on the date and time when the reception of the support mode signal for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is started is stored in the RAM 203 in step S1509. In the following step S1510, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has just finished receiving the open / close execution mode signal.

In step S1510, it may be configured to determine whether or not the reception of the support mode signal is started during the reception of the open / close execution mode signal, and the support mode system may be determined immediately after the reception of the open / close execution mode signal is completed. It may be configured to determine whether or not at least one of the conditions of starting the reception of the signal and starting the reception of the support mode signal during the reception of the open / close execution mode signal is satisfied.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1510, the support mode system notification start process is executed in step S1511. In the notification start processing of the support mode system, the notification indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is started in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. The mode of the notification is arbitrary, but for example, the number-of-times information displayed on the first display unit DC1 may be blinked and displayed, or the dedicated light emitting unit may be lit or blinked. Further, as described above, the notification indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is executed on condition that the support mode signal is received while the open / close execution mode signal is being received. That is, the notification indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is obtained by receiving the support mode signal in the state that the hall computer HC recognizes that it is in the open / close execution mode or after the open / close execution mode. To be started.

When a negative determination is made in step S1508, when a negative determination is made in step S1510, or after the processing of step S1511 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1512, and the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is output to another external device. Execute the process corresponding to. For example, when the reception of the support mode signal is completed, the RAM 203 stores the information on the date and time when the reception of the support mode signal is finished for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time, and the high frequency support mode is in progress. The notification indicating that is terminated.

Further, for example, when the reception of the signal from the external terminal 81e for the number of games is started, the number information of the first display unit DC1 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed is added by 1. The display control of the first display unit DC1 is performed so as to. Further, when the reception of the signal from the external terminal 81g corresponding to the information output indicating that the predetermined number of game balls have been paid out is started, the predetermined number of pachinko machines 10 to be managed this time are stored in the RAM 203. Information indicating that the game ball has been paid out is stored together with date and time information. After executing the process of step S1512, the present management process is terminated.

<Execution timing of external output>
Next, the execution timing of the external output will be described in correspondence with the difference in the open / close execution mode pattern.

First, a case where the open / close execution mode of the pattern D is executed based on the low probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 31 (A).

Note that FIG. 31 (a) shows the output status of commands from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72, FIG. 31 (b) shows the open / closed status of the grand prize opening 32a, and FIG. 31 (c) shows the open / closed status. The output status from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot is shown, FIG. 31 (d) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, and FIG. 31 (e) shows the output status. The output status from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is shown, and FIG. 31 (f) shows a notification indicating that the opening / closing execution mode of the second display unit DC2 is in progress (hereinafter, also referred to as an execution notification). ) Indicates the execution status. Further, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot among the above-mentioned external terminals 81a to 81c, and the second display unit DC2 is external through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. The case where the output status is reflected will be described.

When the effect of the game round is being executed, the variable end command is transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing of t1, and the effect of the game round is terminated. After that, the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t2, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is started when the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. Further, signal output from the main control device 71 is started for all of the external terminal 81a for the jackpot, the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. Then, when the signal output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot to the hall computer HC is started, the execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2.

After that, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the first round game is started, and the round start command is transmitted. Further, when the end condition of the first round game is satisfied at the timing of t4, the large winning opening 32a is closed and the round end command is transmitted. In this case, the opening of the large winning opening 32a is performed in a long-time mode that enables winning of the maximum number of round games.

After that, the opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a is repeated for a long time, and at the timing of t5, which is the timing at which the 15th round game ends, the counting of the waiting time for the ending is started, and the main control device 71 When the ending command is sent from, the production for the ending is started. Then, at the timing of t6, when the waiting time for the ending elapses, the change command and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 71, and a new game round is started. Further, the signal output from the main control device 71 to each of the external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is terminated, the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2 is terminated.

As described above, in the open / close execution mode of the pattern D in which the big winning opening 32a is opened for a long time from the first round game, the outside from the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot from the start timing of the open / close execution mode. By starting the output and continuing until the end timing of the open / close execution mode, the external output is continued during the period when the large winning opening 32a is opened according to the long-time mode. As a result, the external output is continued during the period when a large amount of game balls are paid out through the execution of the open / close execution mode, and the hall computer indicates that the large amount of game balls is paid out through the execution of the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to recognize in HC. That is, by checking the management data created in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp whether the payout of a large amount of game balls is due to fraud or the opening / closing execution mode.

In addition, the manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the execution notification is performed on the second display unit DC2, and whether the payout of a large amount of game balls is due to fraud or the opening / closing execution mode is used. It is possible to easily grasp whether it is a thing.

Further, in the game hall, for each pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls per unit time may be grasped to adjust the nails in the game area. In this case, by making it possible to identify whether or not the opening / closing execution mode in which a large amount of game balls are paid out is in the management data of the hall computer HC, the situation in which the game balls are likely to be paid out and the game ball payout can be determined. It is possible to grasp the number of prize balls per unit time for each of the situations that are unlikely to occur, and it is possible to perform the above nail adjustment satisfactorily.

Furthermore, when the support mode of the electric accessory 34a shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode triggered by the open / close execution mode, the electric accessory 34a is likely to be in the open state, and the lower operating port 34 is awarded a prize. Is likely to occur. In this case, as described above, the external output is performed to the hall computer HC, and the second display unit DC2 is notified during execution, so that the lower operating port 34 is frequently awarded a prize. It becomes possible to grasp whether the is legitimate or fraudulent.

Next, a case where the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the low accuracy jackpot result A or the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode is shown in FIG. 31 ( The explanation will be given with reference to the timing chart of B). The contents of FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (f) have already been described, and the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. The point that the state of the external output through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is reflected is also the same as in the case of FIG. 31 (A).

When the effect of the game round is being executed, the variable end command is transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing of t1, and the effect of the game round is terminated. After that, the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t2, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is started when the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, the signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot and the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, but the signal is not output to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. .. Since the signal is not output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot to the hall computer HC, the second display unit DC2 does not perform the execution notification.

After that, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a in the first round game is performed in a short time mode. In this case, the round start command and the round end command are transmitted at relatively short intervals.

After that, the opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a is repeated in a short time mode, and the counting of the waiting time for the ending is started at the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the 15th round game ends. Then, at the timing of t5, when the waiting time for the ending elapses, the change command and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 71, and a new game round is started. In this case, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot and the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode is terminated.

Here, when the open / close execution mode of pattern A is executed based on the special deviation result, the round start command and the round end command are not transmitted from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. , And the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode is performed, but the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot is not performed. The mode in the execution mode is the same as that in FIG. 31 (B). Furthermore, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, the effect A1 is executed including the display mode of the symbol display device 41. As already explained, if any of the low-accuracy jackpot result A, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, and the special out-of-order result is obtained in the low-frequency support mode, the low-frequency support mode is maintained after the open / close execution mode. In the configuration, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is performed in the relevant situation by predicting which game result is the trigger or which is set to the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode to determine the degree of attention to the game. The purpose is to enhance it. Under such circumstances, by not outputting the signal of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot, the effect of setting the game to be predicted as described above disappears depending on the condition of the external output. You can prevent it from happening.

Further, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, the opening of the large winning opening 32a is performed in a short time mode in which a prize is not substantially generated, and a large amount of game balls are paid out during the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A. If so, it is clearly fraudulent. Then, during the open / close execution mode of the pattern A, there is no problem in monitoring fraud even if the hall computer HC does not know that the open / close execution mode is in progress. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpots in which the external output is not performed during the open / close execution mode of the pattern A, there is no problem in monitoring fraud. Further, there is no problem in management for the purpose of adjusting the nails of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, when the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is changed to the open / close execution mode of the pattern A in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is maintained after the end of the open / close execution mode. There is no problem in monitoring whether the situation in which the lower operating port 34 is frequently won is legitimate or fraudulent.

Next, a case where the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 32.

Note that FIG. 32 (a) shows the output status of commands from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72, FIG. 32 (b) shows the open / closed status of the grand prize opening 32a, and FIG. 32 (c) shows the open / closed status. The execution status of the common effect commonly executed in the open / close execution modes of patterns A to C is shown, and FIG. 32 (d) shows a definite effect indicating that the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A is the execution trigger. 32 (e) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81a for jackpot, and FIG. 32 (f) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode. 32 (g) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot, and FIG. 32 (h) shows the execution status of the execution notification in the second display unit DC2. Is shown. Further, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot among the above-mentioned external terminals 81a to 81c, and the second display unit DC2 is external through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. The case where the output status is reflected will be described.

When the effect of the game round is being executed, the variable end command is transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing of t1, and the effect of the game round is terminated. After that, the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t2, and the common effect is started when the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, the signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot and the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, but the signal is not output to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. .. Since the signal is not output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot to the hall computer HC, the second display unit DC2 does not perform the execution notification. However, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A this time, unlike the case of FIG. 31 (B), a delay time for performing an output delay to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is set.

After that, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a in the first round game is performed in a short time mode. In this case, the round start command and the round end command are transmitted at relatively short intervals.

After that, the opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a is repeated in a short time mode, and the counting of the waiting time for the ending is started at the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the 15th round game ends. In this case, the effect in the open / close execution mode is switched from the common effect to the final effect. As a result, as described above, the player can grasp that the opening / closing execution mode this time is triggered by the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A.

Further, when the delay time elapses at the timing, the signal output from the main control device 71 is started to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. Then, when the signal output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot to the hall computer HC is started, the execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2.

After that, at the timing of t5, the final effect is completed when the waiting time for the ending elapses, and the change command and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 71 to start a new game round. Further, the signal output from the main control device 71 to each of the external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is terminated, the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2 is terminated.

When the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is executed when the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained as described above, the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is performed. .. When the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the low frequency support mode, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A becomes the open / close execution mode of the pattern A, and the low-accuracy jackpot result A, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A or the special deviation Unlike the case where the result is used as a trigger, the high frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode. Under such circumstances, the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is performed, so that even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot, the lower operating port It is possible to monitor whether the situation in which a prize is frequently awarded to 34 is legitimate or fraudulent.

Further, the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started from the middle timing of the open / close execution mode. As a result, if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the game hall, even if the data counter DC is confirmed until the middle of the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, any game result is obtained. Since it is not possible for the player to know whether or not this is the trigger, the effect of having the player predict which game result is the trigger when the open / close execution mode of pattern A is executed is effective. It is possible to manage the pachinko machine 10 without losing it.

In particular, the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is not started in the situation where the common effect is being executed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is managed without losing the effect of causing the player to predict which game result is the trigger by visually recognizing the opening / closing mode and the common effect of the large winning opening 32a. Can be done.

Even when the open / close execution mode of pattern A is executed when the low-accuracy jackpot result A or the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A is executed in the high-frequency support mode, after the above delay time elapses. , The signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform good management when the high-frequency support mode is maintained when the jackpot is won.

Next, a case where the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is executed based on the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 33.

33 (a) shows the output status of the command from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72, FIG. 33 (b) shows the open / closed status of the grand prize opening 32a, and FIG. 33 (c) shows the open / closed status. The execution status of the common effect commonly executed in the open / close execution modes of patterns A to C is shown, and FIG. 33 (d) shows the execution status of the final effect indicating that the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is set. FIG. 33 (e) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot, and FIG. 33 (f) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode. FIG. 33 (g) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot, and FIG. 33 (h) shows the execution status of the execution notification in the second display unit DC2. Further, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot among the above-mentioned external terminals 81a to 81c, and the second display unit DC2 is external through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. The case where the output status is reflected will be described.

When the effect of the game round is being executed, the variable end command is transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing of t1, and the effect of the game round is terminated. After that, the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t2, and the common effect is started when the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, the signal output from the main control device 71 is started to the external terminal 81a for the jackpot and the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode, but the signal is not output to the external terminal 81a for the conditional jackpot. Since the signal is not output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot to the hall computer HC, the second display unit DC2 does not perform the execution notification. However, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A this time, unlike the case of FIG. 31 (B), a delay time for performing an output delay to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is set.

After that, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the first round game is started. Here, as already explained, in the open / close execution mode of the pattern B triggered by the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B, the big winning opening 32a is opened 15 times in the short-time mode in the first round game, so that t3 After the timing of, the opening of the large winning opening 32a in a short time mode is repeated.

After that, at the timing of t4, the common section in which the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 32a is common in the opening / closing execution modes of patterns A to C ends, so that the production in the opening / closing execution mode is changed from the common production. Switch to final production. As a result, as described above, the player can grasp that this time is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B.

Further, when the delay time elapses at the timing, the signal output from the main control device 71 is started to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, the execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2. By the way, since the 1R round game ends at the timing of t4, the round end command is transmitted.

After that, at the timing of t5, as the second round game, the big winning opening 32a is opened once in a short time mode. In this case, the round start command and the round end command are transmitted at relatively short intervals.

After that, at the timing of t6, the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the third round game is started, and the round start command is transmitted. Further, when the end condition of the 3R round game is satisfied at the timing of t7, the large winning opening 32a is closed and the round end command is transmitted. In this case, the opening of the large winning opening 32a is performed in a long-time mode that enables winning of the maximum number of round games.

After that, the opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a is repeated for a long time, and at the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the 15th round game ends, the counting of the waiting time for the ending is started, and the main control device 71 When the ending command is sent from, the production for the ending is started. Then, at the timing of t9, when the waiting time for the ending elapses, the change command and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 71, and a new game round is started. Further, the signal output from the main control device 71 to each of the external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is terminated, the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2 is terminated.

When the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is executed as described above, a conditional jackpot is started before the opening of the grand prize opening 32a by the long-time mode in which a large amount of game balls are paid out is started. The signal of the main control device 71 is output to the external terminal 81c for use. As a result, during the period when a large amount of game balls are paid out through the execution of the open / close execution mode, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot, the large amount of game balls is paid out. It becomes possible for the hall computer HC to recognize that it is through the execution of the open / close execution mode. Further, as in the case of FIG. 32, it is possible to monitor whether the situation in which the lower operating port 34 is frequently won is a legitimate one or an illegal one.

Further, the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started from the middle timing of the open / close execution mode. As a result, if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the game hall, even if the data counter DC is confirmed until the middle of the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, any pattern A The player cannot grasp which pattern of the pattern C is. Therefore, the effect of causing the player to predict which pattern of the opening / closing execution mode is being executed in the common section in which the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 32a is common in the patterns A to C disappears. It is possible to manage the pachinko machine 10 without having to do so.

In particular, the signal output of the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is not started in the situation where the common effect is being executed. Therefore, by visually recognizing the opening / closing mode and the common effect of the large winning opening 32a, the pachinko machine 10 is managed without losing the effect of causing the player to predict which pattern of the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. Can be done.

When the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is executed based on the low-accuracy jackpot result B or the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B, the large winning opening 32a according to the short-time mode in the 1st and 2nd rounds Although the distribution of the number of times of opening is different, it is the same as the case of FIG. 33 in other respects. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, although the opening patterns of the first and second R large winning openings 32a and the number of consecutive times of opening the large winning openings 32a according to the short-time mode are different, the main ones are for the external terminals 81a to 81c. The signal output pattern and output start timing from the control device 71 are the same as in the case of FIG. 33.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As a result of the game based on both the winning / failing lottery and the sorting lottery in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the winning / losing lottery mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is performed. By differentiating a plurality of types of elements such as a support mode setting mode and setting a plurality of types of game results, the game can be diversified. In this case, the frequency with which a predetermined control mode is selected as the open / close control mode of the large winning opening 32a from the start timing to at least the intermediate timing in the open / close execution mode differs depending on the subsequent contents. As a result, the player can predict the content determined as the subsequent progress destination by confirming the state of the variable winning device 32 after the start execution mode is started. Therefore, when the player shifts to the open / close execution mode, the player does not simply digest the open / close execution mode, but predicts whether the contents during the open / close execution mode or after the open / close execution mode are desirable for the player. While it is expected to digest the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the open / close execution mode.

In the opening / closing execution modes of patterns A to C, the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed from the start timing to at least the middle timing and the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a at each time are common. As a result, when the open / close execution mode is started, it is considered that the player plays the game while expecting that the subsequent contents become desirable at least in the common section. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a good feeling of expectation of the player when the opening / closing execution mode is started.

Further, in the plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes having the common section, the number of times of opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a differs depending on the continuous short-time mode including the common section. When the information for making the prediction is provided by the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed in the same manner, the factors that the player should pay attention to in making the prediction become clear. Further, according to the configuration, the player is expected to pay attention to the variable winning device 32 from the start of the opening / closing execution mode so as not to miss the count of the number of times.

In a common section in which the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed and the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a each time are common in a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes, the opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a is repeatedly executed in a short time mode. As a result, it is possible to change the state of the variable winning device 32 in the common section as compared with the configuration in which the large winning opening 32a is opened only once in the common section while giving commonality in the common section. Will be. In addition, a common section can be provided while suppressing an extremely increase in the number of balls entering the large winning opening 32a in the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the possibility that the upper limit number of game balls will be won while the large winning opening 32a is open due to the short-time mode and the round game will be terminated is reduced, and the large winning opening 32a according to the short-time mode It becomes easy for the player to confirm how the opening and closing is repeated over a plurality of times.

In order to enable the management of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC of the game hall, in a configuration in which an external output is made from the external terminal plate 81 at the time of transition of the game state or the like, the external terminal plate 81 has an external terminal for a conditional jackpot. 81c is provided so that external output is not performed from the external terminal 81c in the common section. As a result, even if the data counter DC is confirmed in the common section, the player cannot grasp the type of open / close execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the transition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of setting the common section.

Further, in the above common section, a common effect is executed as a low identification effect so that the player cannot grasp the type of open / close execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the transition. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of setting the common section, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the open / close execution mode. In this case, the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is not output from the external terminal 81c in the situation where the above-mentioned common effect is being executed. As a result, even if the data counter DC is confirmed in the situation where the common effect is being executed, the player cannot grasp the type of the open / close execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the transition. Therefore, it is possible to manage the pachinko machine 10 without losing the effect of performing the common effect.

Here, in the case of a special deviation result, the open / close execution mode of pattern A in which the payout of the game ball cannot be substantially expected is executed, and after the execution of the open / close execution mode, before the execution of the open / close execution mode. Return to the game state. That is, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special deviation result is executed for the purpose of production, and does not substantially contribute to the profit of the player. Then, by reflecting the number of times of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special deviation result in the number of times information of the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC, the selection of the pachinko machine 10 to play the game by itself is selected by the second display unit. It is not preferable for a player who wants to confirm the contents of DC2. On the other hand, if the transition of the open / close execution mode triggered by the special deviation result is not output externally and the transition of the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is externally output, the open / close execution mode of pattern A is executed. By checking the data counter DC in this case, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the game result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode is a special deviation result. In this case, the effect of setting the special deviation result as the game result disappears. Under such circumstances, by providing the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot as described above and not performing the external output related to the execution of the opening / closing execution mode in the common section, the opening / closing execution triggered by the jackpot result is executed. While making it possible to manage the execution of the mode, it is possible to preferably bring out the effect of setting the special deviation result.

When the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is set, the external output from the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started by the time when the common section elapses and the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. To. As a result, it is possible to satisfactorily manage the period during which a large amount of game balls are paid out in the open / close execution mode while keeping the effect of setting the common section.

When the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode of the pattern A, the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is used until the common section elapses and the game state of the high-frequency support mode is started. External output of is started. As a result, while keeping the effect of setting the common section, the frequency of winning the lower operating port 34 and the monitoring of the act of illegally opening the electric accessory 34a are performed well. be able to.

Since the external terminal 81d for the support mode is provided separately from the external terminals 81a to 81c of the open / close execution mode system, the hall computer HC shifts to the open / close execution mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish and recognize. This makes it possible to manage whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and also manage whether or not the transition to the high-frequency support mode has been performed without triggering the end of the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to do. In such a configuration, in order to make it difficult to grasp the type of open / close execution mode being executed and the player of the game result that triggered the transition, external output is performed in any open / close execution mode. If this is not done, it will be difficult to manage whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set when the open / close execution mode ends. On the other hand, as described above, when the high frequency support mode is set, the external output is performed in advance during the open / close execution mode, so that the above management can be performed satisfactorily.

When the game result becomes the low-accuracy jackpot result A or the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A in the low-frequency support mode and shifts to the open / close execution mode of the pattern A, the external output is not performed when the transition of the game state is triggered. .. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed in the low frequency support mode triggered by the special deviation result, the low accuracy jackpot result A or the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A, after the opening / closing execution mode. However, the game result that triggered the transition cannot be grasped from the data counter DC. Therefore, by setting the transition mode of the game state as described above, the effect that it is possible to pay attention not only to the game in the open / close execution mode but also to the game after the open / close execution mode is not lost. It is possible to manage the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall.

Further, when the payout of the game ball does not substantially occur during the opening / closing execution mode and the low frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode, it is not necessary to perform external output during the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, even if the external output is prevented as described above, there is no problem in managing the pachinko machine 10.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the external output corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, among the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal plates 81 provided on the pachinko machine 10, the contents of information output from the three external terminals 81a to 81c used when the open / close execution mode is executed. Is different from the first embodiment described above.

Specifically, the information indicating that the external terminal 81a used as the external terminal 81a for the jackpot in the first embodiment is in the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening of the big winning opening 32a occurs in a short time mode. It is used as a first external terminal 81a for outputting (first information or first signal).

Further, information indicating that the external terminal 81b used as the external terminal 81b for the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment is in the opening / closing execution mode in which the large winning opening 32a is opened depending on the long-time mode. It is used as a second external terminal 81b for outputting (second information or second signal).

Further, the external terminal 81c used as the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot in the first embodiment is triggered by the jackpot result in which the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is set to the high frequency support mode after the end. It is used as a third external terminal 81c for outputting information (third information or third signal) indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress.

Since the information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode is output through the third external terminal 81c, the external terminal 81d for the support mode in the first embodiment outputs other information. Used for

<Processing related to external output executed by the main controller 71>
In the first embodiment, the external output setting process (FIG. 28) at the time of mode transition and the external output setting process (FIG. 29) for delay are set as the process for starting the external output during the open / close execution mode. However, in the present embodiment, the external output setting process for delay is not set among these processes, and the processing content of the external output setting process at the time of mode transition is different from that of the first embodiment. There is.

<External output setting processing at the time of mode transition>
The external output setting process at the time of mode transition in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. The external output setting process at the time of mode transition in this embodiment is executed at the timing of step S511 in the game state transition process (FIG. 15) as in the first embodiment.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening of the large winning opening 32a occurs in a short time mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a game result that is neither the low probability jackpot result C nor the most advantageous jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, “1” is set in the first unit area 121 corresponding to the first external terminal 81a in the external output buffer 94d in step S1602. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output from the main control device 71 to the first external terminal 81a is started, and is attached to the first external terminal 81a. It is possible to output the first signal to the hall computer HC as information.

When a negative determination is made in step S1601 or after the processing of step S1602 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1603, and it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation result. If the result is a special deviation, the external output setting process is terminated without executing the process related to the output setting of the second external terminal 81b and the third external terminal 81c in steps S1604 to S1607. That is, in the open / close execution mode executed when the special disconnection result is obtained, the external output is performed through the first external terminal 81a, but the external output through the second external terminal 81b and the third external terminal 81c are used. No external output is done.

If a negative determination is made in step S1603, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is an opening / closing execution mode in which the large winning opening 32a is opened depending on the long-time mode. Specifically, the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a game result that is neither a low probability jackpot result A, an unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A, an explicit high accuracy jackpot result A, or a special deviation result. Determine if it exists. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, "1" is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the second external terminal 81b in the external output buffer 94d in step S1605. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output from the main control device 71 to the second external terminal 81b is started and is attached to the second external terminal 81b. It is possible to output the second signal to the hall computer HC as information.

When a negative determination is made in step S1604 or after the processing of step S1605 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1606, and the opening / closing execution is triggered by the jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end. Determine if it is in mode. Specifically, if the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is any of the low-accuracy jackpot result C, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot results A to C, and the most advantageous jackpot result, step S1606 is performed. Make an affirmative judgment. Further, even in the case of the open / close execution mode triggered by either the low-accuracy jackpot results A to B or the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot results A to B during the high-frequency support mode, a positive determination is made in step S1606. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S1606, the external output setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, "1" is set in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the third external terminal 81c in the external output buffer 94d in step S1607. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output from the main control device 71 to the third external terminal 81c is started, and is attached to the third external terminal 81c. It is possible to output the third signal to the hall computer HC as information. After that, the external output setting process is terminated.

<Processing related to release of signal output>
The situation where the signal is output from the main control device 71 to the first external terminal 81a and the second external terminal 81b is determined by the external output release process executed in step S413 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14). It will be released. Further, the situation where the signal is output from the main control device 71 to the third external terminal 81c is after a positive determination is made in step S503 of the game state transition process (FIG. 15) and at the time of mode transition. It is canceled before the external output setting process of is started. However, in the case of the open / close execution mode triggered by the special deviation result, the release process is not executed. Further, in the situation where the signal is output from the main control device 71 to the third external terminal 81c, in addition to the above case, the frequency is low after the high frequency support mode is continued for 100 game times. It is also canceled when shifting to support mode.

<About the processing executed by the hall computer HC>
Next, the processing executed by the hall computer HC will be described.

In the first embodiment, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to only one of the plurality of external terminals 81a to 81c that output information associated with the execution of the open / close execution mode. However, in the present embodiment, it is electrically connected to all of the first external terminal 81a, the second external terminal 81b, and the third external terminal 81c. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is managed according to the information output from the external terminals 81a to 81c.

<Management process>
First, the management process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is periodically started at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec.

First, in step S1701, the management target counter is updated in the same manner as in step S1501 in the first embodiment. In the following step S1702, reception confirmation processing of the first to third signals is executed for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time.

In the reception confirmation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the reception of the first signal is started from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the RAM 203 stores information on the time when the first signal reception is started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time in step S1802. In the following step S1803, the first reception start flag is set in the RAM 203 as information indicating that the reception of the first signal has started.

When a negative determination is made in step S1801 or after the processing of step S1803 is executed, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the reception of the second signal is started from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, information on the time when the second signal reception is started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is stored in the RAM 203 in step S1805. In the following step S1806, the second reception start flag is set in the RAM 203 as information indicating that the reception of the second signal has started.

When a negative determination is made in step S1804 or after the processing of step S1806 is executed, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the reception of the third signal is started from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If a negative determination is made in step S1807, the present reception confirmation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, in step S1808, information on the time when the reception of the third signal of the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is started is stored in the RAM 203.

After that, in step S1809, the third reception start flag is set in the RAM 203 as information indicating that the reception of the third signal has started, and as information indicating that the third signal is being received in step S1810. The third receiving flag is set in the RAM 203. After that, the reception confirmation process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the management process (FIG. 35), after executing the process of step S1702, the processes after step S1703 are executed. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the second reception start flag is set in the RAM 203. If the second reception start flag is set, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the first reception start flag is set in the RAM 203.

The situation where the second reception start flag is set but the first reception start flag is not set means that the large winning opening 32a is not opened by the short-time mode, and it takes a long time from the first opening time. It means that the mode has shifted to the open / close execution mode in which the large winning opening 32a is opened according to the mode. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705, and the control start process of the second display unit is executed. The specific content of the process is the same as in step S1504 in the first embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to step S1709.

In the situation where both the first reception start flag and the second reception start flag are set, the large winning opening 32a is opened in the long-time mode after the large winning opening 32a is opened in the short-time mode. It means that the mode has been changed to the open / close execution mode. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, and the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, the delay flag is set in the RAM 203, and "12950" is set in the delay timer counter DT provided in the RAM 203. Then, the process proceeds to step S1709.

The delay flag is information for the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC to recognize that the control start processing of the second display unit is delayed. Further, the delay timer counter DT is a counter for the MPU 201 to grasp at what timing the situation in which the execution of the control start process of the second display unit is delayed is canceled. Since the numerical information set in the delay timer counter DT is updated so as to be decremented by 1 in a cycle of 2 msec, the delay time (delay period) set in step S1706 is 25.9 sec. This time is the same as or substantially the same as the time required from the start timing to the end of the common section in the open / close execution modes of patterns A to C, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1707. Here, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, at least one of the first signal and the second signal is output from the pachinko machine 10, so that the case of making a negative determination in step S1703 is the reception of the first signal. However, it means that the reception of the second signal has not been started. That is, it means that the mode A has shifted to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A in which only the large winning opening 32a is opened in the short-time mode without opening the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode or the medium-time mode. In step S1707, it is determined whether or not the third reception start flag is set in the RAM 203.

The situation in which the first reception start flag and the third reception start flag are set while the second reception start flag is not set is the open / close execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the big hit result. It means that the mode has been changed to the open / close execution mode in which the high frequency support mode is set after the end. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, and the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, similarly to step S1706, the delay flag is set in the RAM 203, and "12950" is set in the delay timer counter DT provided in the RAM 203. Then, the process proceeds to step S1709.

The situation where both the second reception start flag and the third reception start flag are not set while the first reception start flag is set shifts to the open / close execution mode when a special deviation result occurs. This means that the mode A has been changed to the open / close execution mode in which the low frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the big hit result. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S1707, and the process proceeds to step S1709 as it is.

In step S1709, each reception start flag is cleared. In the following step S1710, it is determined whether or not the delay flag is set in the RAM 203. If the delay flag is set, in step S1711, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the delay timer counter DT is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the delay time has elapsed. If the delay timer counter DT is "0", the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, the control start process of the second display unit is executed. The specific content of the process is the same as in step S1504 in the first embodiment. After that, the delay flag is cleared in step S1713.

If a negative determination is made in step S1710, a negative determination is made in step S1711, or the process of step S1713 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1714. In step S1714, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has finished receiving at least one of the first signal and the second signal.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1714, in step S1715, the RAM 203 ends the reception of the first signal and the second signal of the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time, for which the end of the current reception is confirmed. Stores information on the time spent. In the following step S1716, the control end processing of the second display unit is executed. In this case, if a predetermined notification is executed by the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time, the control for terminating it is executed.

After that, in step S1717, it is determined whether or not the third receiving flag is set in the RAM 203. If the third reception flag is set, the support mode system notification start process is executed in step S1718. The specific content of the process is the same as in step S1511 in the first embodiment.

When a negative determination is made in step S1714, when a negative determination is made in step S1717, or after the processing of step S1718 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1719, and the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is output to another external output. After executing the corresponding process, this management process ends. In step S1719, for example, when the reception of the third signal is completed, the RAM 203 stores the information of the time when the reception of the third signal is completed for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time, and the third reception flag. Is cleared, and the notification indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is terminated. The other processing contents are the same as those in step S1512 in the first embodiment.

By executing the management process as described above, the notification corresponding to the shift of the open / close execution mode in the data counter DC is performed in an manner corresponding to the type of the open / close execution mode related to the shift. That is, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is executed, it is the timing at which the common section in which the operation of the variable winning device 32 is common to the open / close execution mode of the pattern A ends, and corresponds to the common section. The notification in the data counter DC is started at the timing before the common effect is completed and the final effect is started.

Further, even when the open / close execution mode of pattern A is executed triggered by the jackpot result in which the high frequency support mode is set after the end, the above notification in the data counter DC is started at the timing when the common section ends. To. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the execution management of opening the large winning opening 32a and the transition management to the high frequency support mode according to the long-time mode are performed without losing the effect of setting the common section and the common effect. It can be done well.

<Management data output processing>
Next, the output processing of the management data will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37 (a). The output process of the management data is periodically started at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec while avoiding being started at the same time as the management process.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not an output request for management data has been made. An information input device such as a keyboard and a display device such as a display for outputting and displaying information corresponding to the processing result are connected to the hall computer HC, and the manager of the game hall uses the information input device while visually recognizing the display device. A program that enables the desired management data of the pachinko machine 10 to be read out by operating the device is stored in advance. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the management data output request is made through the operation of the information input device by the administrator.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the output process of this management data is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, in step S1902, a unit number grasping process is executed in order to grasp the pachinko machine 10 related to the output request this time. That is, when the administrator performs an operation for reading the management data of the desired pachinko machine 10, in addition to the operation for reading, the input of the machine number which is the information for identifying the desired pachinko machine 10. The operation is performed. In step S1902, the information of the unit number for which the input operation is performed is grasped.

In the following step S1903, the management data extraction process is executed. In the extraction process, for the pachinko machine 10 having the unit number grasped in step S1902, information indicating the reception start time and reception end time of each signal is read from the management data created in the RAM 203, and the read information is read out. Create data arranged in chronological order.

In addition, in the case of storing the reception start time in the RAM 203 in step S1802, step S1805 and step S1808, or in the case of storing the reception end time in the RAM 203 in step S1715 and step S1719, the target pachinko machine 10 The information of the machine number of is associated and stored. Therefore, in the process of step S1903, it is possible to perform extraction by the unit number.

After that, in step S1904, a process for outputting the data created in step S1903 to the display screen of the display device is executed. After that, the output processing of this management data is completed.

By executing the management data output processing as described above, the manager of the game hall can confirm the data of 10 units of the pachinko machine as shown in FIG. 37 (b). As a result, the number of times each pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to the open / close execution mode, the time spent in the open / close execution mode, the number of times the machine has shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the time spent in the high-frequency support mode, and the like can be accurately determined. It becomes possible to grasp and appropriately manage the pachinko machine 10. For example, although not shown in FIG. 37 (b), by collating the prize ball generation information with each of the above information, it is possible to satisfactorily perform ball ejection adjustment such as nail adjustment, and it is illegal. The presence or absence can be confirmed satisfactorily.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, any signal is output at the start timing regardless of the type, and the reception start time information is stored in the RAM 203. As a result, in the configuration in which the notification indicating that the data counter DC has shifted to the open / close execution mode is delayed or not performed depending on the type of the open / close execution mode and the setting status of the support mode after the end, the hall computer HC In the management data of, the information of the start time of the open / close execution mode is stored regardless of the execution status of the notification. Therefore, the execution management of the open / close execution mode can be performed well.

Further, in the management data, not only the information at the start and end of reception of the first signal but also the information at the start and end of reception of the second signal is stored. Therefore, as the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a, a short-time mode and a long-time mode are set, an opening / closing execution mode in which only one of them is executed is set, and the opening mode is switched in the middle. In the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode is set, it is possible to distinguish between a section in which a substantially large amount of prize balls are generated and a section in which a substantially large number of prize balls are not generated.

In particular, since winning a prize in the variable winning device 32 can occur even in a section where the opening is performed in a short time mode, registration of information regarding the occurrence of the section in the management data is not omitted, but the section is opened. By registering the information related to the occurrence in the management data, it is possible to manage the generation of prize balls satisfactorily.

Further, in the management data, not only the information at the start and end of reception of the first signal but also the information at the start and end of reception of the third signal is stored. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily manage the number of times of the open / close execution mode that triggered the transition to the high frequency support mode.

The period in which the management data is stored and retained in the RAM 203 is arbitrary, and may be updated every day or every few days. In the configuration in which the management data is stored and retained for a plurality of days, when reading the data of the predetermined pachinko machine 10, the information for all the days stored in the storage may be read out, and the administrator may use the configuration. The configuration may be such that only the information corresponding to the date specified by is read out.

Further, although the description is omitted in the first embodiment, the management data output process is also executed in the game system in the first embodiment.

Further, even if the hall computer HC continues to receive the third signal, it is in the support mode as long as it recognizes that it is in the open / close execution mode through the reception of the first signal or the second signal. May be configured to interrupt the notification indicating that is in the high frequency support mode.

Further, when the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 enters the open / close execution mode that triggers the output of the third signal during the output of the third signal, the output of the third signal is interrupted by the hall computer HC. The output of the third signal may be intentionally interrupted to the extent that the above can be recognized. That is, the output of the third signal may be restarted when a predetermined wait time elapses after switching from the state of outputting the third signal to the state of stopping the output. In this case, the hall computer HC can individually grasp the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode that triggers the output of the third signal, and can reflect the occurrence status in the management data.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the external output corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, among the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal plates 81 provided on the pachinko machine 10, the contents of information output from the three external terminals 81a to 81c used when the open / close execution mode is executed. Is different from the first embodiment described above.

Specifically, the external terminal 81a used as the jackpot external terminal 81a in the first embodiment is irrespective of whether the game result that triggered the transition is the jackpot result or the special missed result. , It is used as a first external terminal 81a for outputting information (first information or first signal) indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress.

Further, in the external terminal 81b used as the external terminal 81b for the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment, the opening of the large winning opening 32a due to the long-time mode occurs at the next opening time, and the opening is in progress. It is used as a second external terminal 81b for outputting information (second information or second signal) indicating that.

Further, the external terminal 81c used as the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot in the first embodiment is triggered by the jackpot result in which the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is set to the high frequency support mode after the end. It is used as a third external terminal 81c for outputting information (third information or a third signal) indicating that the waiting time for ending is started and that the waiting time is in the open / closed execution mode.

Since the state in which the signal is output from the third external terminal 81c is released when the open / close execution mode ends, the external terminal plate 81 is provided with high-frequency support as in the first embodiment. An external terminal 81d for the support mode is provided as a terminal for outputting information indicating that the mode is in progress.

<Processing related to external output executed by the main controller 71>
In the first embodiment, the external output setting process (FIG. 28) at the time of mode transition and the external output setting process (FIG. 29) for delay are set as the process for starting the external output during the open / close execution mode. However, in the present embodiment, these processes are not set, and a process instead of these processes is executed in the game state transition process.

<Game state transition process>
The game state transition process in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 of one game round is completed. If it is not the timing when the variation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is. When the variation display is finished, in step S2003, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times finished this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode.

If it does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If it corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current game result is a special deviation result. In the case of a special deviation result, in step S2005, the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 is one of the termination conditions of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special deviation result. Set "9" as the upper limit number. Further, in step S2006, "15" is set in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

On the other hand, if it is not a special deviation result, that is, if it is one of the big hit results, "15" is set in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S2007. After executing the process of step S2007, the setting process for the round is executed in step S2008. The processing content of the setting process for the round is the same as that of the first embodiment.

After executing the process of step S2006 or step S2008, in step S2009, "2000" is set as the waiting time (standby period) for the opening in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. After executing the process of step S2009, the opening command is set in step S2010.

After that, in step S2011, "1" is set in the first unit area 121 corresponding to the first external terminal 81a in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output from the main control device 71 to the first external terminal 81a is started, and is attached to the first external terminal 81a. It is possible to output the first signal to the hall computer HC as information. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2012 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. Then, after executing at least one process from step S2013 to step S2014, the game state transition process is terminated. Since the processing contents of steps S2013 to S2016 are the same as the processing contents of steps S514 to S517 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Opening and closing of the winning opening>
Next, the large winning opening opening / closing process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 32a is open. If the large winning opening 32a is not open, in step S2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0", and in step S2103, whether the value of the timer counter T is "0". Determine if not.

If the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. If the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter T is "0", the large winning opening opening / closing process is performed after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S2104. finish.

The large winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40.

First, in step S2201, the game result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is one of the low probability jackpot result A, the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A, the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A, and the special deviation result. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the timer counter T is set to "30" in step S2202.

When a negative judgment is made in step S2201, the situation in which the current big winning opening opening process is activated in step S2203 is that the game result triggered by the above is the low probability big hit result B and the 1st round ~ Whether the game result that triggered the above is the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B and whether it corresponds to the 1st to 2nd rounds, the game result that triggered the above is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result. Whether it corresponds to the 1st to 2nd rounds as well as B, or whether the game result that triggered the above corresponds to the explicit high accuracy jackpot result C and the 1st round, which is not the final opening / closing timing. , Is determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, "30" is set in the timer counter T in step S2202. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, the situation in which the large winning opening opening process is activated corresponds to the situation in which the game result that triggered the above is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result C and the first round and the final opening / closing timing. Determine if it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, "10000" is set in the timer counter T in step S2205. After that, in step S2206, "1" is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the second external terminal 81b in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output from the main control device 71 to the second external terminal 81b is started and is attached to the second external terminal 81b. It is possible to output the second signal to the hall computer HC as information.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, "14500" is set in the timer counter T in step S2207. After that, in step S2208, “1” is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the second external terminal 81b in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output from the main control device 71 to the second external terminal 81b is started and is attached to the second external terminal 81b. It is possible to output the second signal to the hall computer HC as information.

After executing the process of step S2202, step S2206, or step S2208, the open execution process is executed in step S2209. In the open execution process, the variable winning drive unit 32c is driven and controlled so that the large winning opening 32a is in the open state. In the following step S2210, it is determined whether or not the opening of the large winning opening 32a this time is related to a new start of the round game in the round number specified mode. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2210, the round start command is set in step S2211, and then the main prize opening process is ended. If a negative judgment is made in step S2210, the main prize is awarded as it is. End the mouth opening process.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 39), if it is determined in step S2101 that the large winning opening 32a is open, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, by determining whether or not the timer counter T is "0", it is determined whether or not the opening duration has elapsed for the opening of the current large winning opening 32a. If the timer counter T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2106.

In step S2106, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 32a. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is. If a prize has been won, the numerical information of the prize counter PC is updated so as to be subtracted by 1 in step S2107. In the following step S2108, it is determined whether or not this is the first R of the round number regulation mode and the opening mode of the variable winning device 32 is the short-time mode. In this situation, a premium command is set in step S2109.

When a negative determination is made in step S2108 or after the process of step S2109 is executed, it is determined in step S2110 whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". If the winning counter PC is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. If the winning counter PC is "0", the closing execution process is executed in step S2111.

In the following step S2112, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a special deviation result. If it is not a special deviation result, a round end command is set in step S2113.

In the following step S2114, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and then in step S2115, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the round setting process is executed in step S2116. The processing content of the setting process for the round is the same as that of the first embodiment. After that, in step S2117, after setting "750" in the timer counter T, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed.

If it is determined in step S2112 that the game result that triggered the transition is a special deviation result, or if it is determined in step S2115 that the round counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S2118. In step S2118, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is the jackpot result, and the support mode of the electric accessory 34a becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2118, “1” is set in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the third external terminal 81c in the external output buffer 94d in step S2119. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), the signal output from the main control device 71 to the third external terminal 81c is started, and is attached to the third external terminal 81c. It becomes possible to output the third signal as information to the hall computer HC.

When a negative determination is made in step S2118 or after the process of step S2119 is executed, "3000" is set in the timer counter T as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending in step S2120. After that, in step S2121, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S2122. Since the processing contents of steps S212 to S2128 are the same as the processing contents of steps S720 to S726 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Processing related to release of signal output>
The situation where the signal is output from the main control device 71 toward the first external terminal 81a, the second external terminal 81b, and the third external terminal 81c is executed in step S413 of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 14). It is released by the external output release process. Further, as already described, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the external terminal 81d for the support mode is provided, and information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress through the external terminal 81d. Is output. In this case, the processing configuration for starting and canceling the output is the same as that of the first embodiment.

<About the processing executed by the hall computer HC>
Next, the processing executed by the hall computer HC will be described.

In the first embodiment, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to only one of the plurality of external terminals 81a to 81c that output information associated with the execution of the open / close execution mode. However, in the present embodiment, it is electrically connected to all of the first external terminal 81a, the second external terminal 81b, and the third external terminal 81c. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is managed according to the information output from the external terminals 81a to 81c.

<Management process>
The management process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is periodically started at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec.

First, in step S2301, the managed target counter provided in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC is updated. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is changed from the previous time.

In the following step S2302, it is determined whether or not the reception of the first signal is started from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, in step S2303, information on the time when the first signal reception is started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is stored in the RAM 203.

When a negative determination is made in step S2302 or after the processing in step S2303 is executed, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the reception of the second signal is started from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2304, information on the time when the second signal reception is started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is stored in the RAM 203 in step S2305. In the following step S2306, the control start process of the second display unit is executed. The specific content of the process is the same as in step S1504 in the first embodiment.

When a negative determination is made in step S2304 or after the processing in step S2306 is executed, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not reception of the third signal is started from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2307, in step S2308, information on the time when the reception of the third signal of the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is started is stored in the RAM 203.

In the following step S2309, it is determined whether or not the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has been notified that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2309, the control start process of the second display unit is executed in step S2310. The specific content of the process is the same as in step S1504 in the first embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S2307, an affirmative determination is made in step S2309, or after the processing in step S2310 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has finished receiving at least one of the first signal, the second signal, and the third signal.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2311, in step S2312, the signal in which the end of reception of the first signal, the second signal, and the third signal of the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is confirmed in the RAM 203. Stores information on the time when the reception of. In the following step S2313, the control end processing of the second display unit is executed. In this case, if a predetermined notification is executed by the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time, the control for terminating it is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2311 or after the processing in step S2313 is executed, other signal correspondence processing is executed in step S2314. Specifically, the same processing as in steps S1508 to S1512 in the first embodiment is executed. After that, this management process is terminated.

By executing the management process as described above, the notification corresponding to the shift of the open / close execution mode in the data counter DC is performed in an manner corresponding to the type of the open / close execution mode related to the shift. That is, when the open / close execution mode of the pattern B is executed, it is the timing at which the common section in which the operation of the variable winning device 32 is common to the open / close execution mode of the pattern A ends, and corresponds to the common section. The notification in the data counter DC is started at the timing before the common effect is completed and the final effect is started.

Further, even when the open / close execution mode of pattern A is executed triggered by the jackpot result in which the high frequency support mode is set after the end, the above notification in the data counter DC is started at the timing when the common section ends. To. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the execution management of opening the large winning opening 32a and the transition management to the high frequency support mode according to the long-time mode are performed without losing the effect of setting the common section and the common effect. It can be done well.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the output of the second signal or the third signal is started is determined in relation to the execution order with other processes on the program, and the first embodiment and the first embodiment are described. There is no need to measure the delay time as in the second embodiment. That is, the above-mentioned excellent effect can be obtained while omitting the hardware configuration and the software configuration related to the measurement of the delay time.

Further, although the description by illustration is omitted, the management data output process is executed even in this embodiment. In this case, in the present embodiment, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the output of the first signal is started at the start timing regardless of the type, and the information of the reception start time is stored in the RAM 203. To. As a result, in the configuration in which the notification indicating that the data counter DC has shifted to the open / close execution mode is delayed or not performed depending on the type of the open / close execution mode and the setting status of the support mode after the end, the hall computer HC In the management data of, the information of the start time of the open / close execution mode is stored regardless of the execution status of the notification. Therefore, the execution management of the open / close execution mode can be performed well.

Further, in the management data, not only the information at the start and end of reception of the first signal but also the information at the start and end of reception of the second signal is stored. Therefore, as the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a, a short-time mode and a long-time mode are set, an opening / closing execution mode in which only one of them is executed is set, and the opening mode is switched in the middle. In the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode is set, it is possible to distinguish between a section in which a substantially large amount of prize balls are generated and a section in which a substantially large number of prize balls are not generated.

In particular, since winning a prize in the variable winning device 32 can occur even in a section where the opening is performed in a short time mode, registration of information regarding the occurrence of the section in the management data is not omitted, but the section is opened. By registering the information related to the occurrence in the management data, it is possible to manage the generation of prize balls satisfactorily.

Further, in the management data, not only the information at the start and end of reception of the first signal but also the information at the start and end of reception of the third signal is stored. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily manage the number of times of the open / close execution mode that triggered the transition to the high frequency support mode.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied independently to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination.

(1) The delay time of the signal output from the main control device 71 with respect to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot when the pattern A shifts to the open / close execution mode is not limited to that of the first embodiment.

(1-1) For example, the delay time may be set as the time until the timing in the middle of the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 32a is common. More specifically, the delay time is defined as the time until the timing in the middle of the last opening time of the large winning opening 32a in the common section or the timing in the middle of the waiting time between the last opening time and the immediately preceding opening time. May be set.

Further, in the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the delay time elapses, or may end when the delay time elapses, and the common section may end after the delay time elapses. It may be configured to end by the timing of ending, it may be configured to end at the timing when the common section ends, or it may be configured to end after the common section ends. However, considering that among the common section of the large winning opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is the easiest for the player to pay attention to, after the common effect is completed. Alternatively, it is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started at the end timing thereof.

(1-2) The delay time may be set as the time until the timing after the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 32a is common. However, in order to be able to start the signal output before the game state by the high frequency support mode is started after the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is finished, the last opening times of the big winning opening 32a in the common section are set. A configuration in which the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started from the end to the elapse of the waiting time for the ending, more specifically, during the waiting time for the ending. Is preferable.

Further, in the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the common section ends, or may end at the timing when the common section ends, and a delay time elapses after the common section ends. It may be configured to end by, it may be configured to end when the delay time has elapsed, or it may be configured to end after the delay time has elapsed. However, among the common section of the grand prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is the easiest for the player to pay attention to, and the next easiest to pay attention to is the grand prize. Considering the port 32a, the common section ends at the same time as the common effect, or the common section ends after the common effect ends, and then a signal from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. It is preferable that the output is started.

(1-3) Further, in the second embodiment, the start timing of the notification in the data counter DC when the pattern A shifts to the open / close execution mode is set in relation to the common effect and the common section (1-1). ) And (1-2) may be changed. In this case, it is necessary to change the delay time measured by the hall computer HC accordingly.

(1-4) Further, in the third embodiment, the start timing of the notification in the data counter DC when the pattern A shifts to the open / close execution mode is set in relation to the common effect and the common section (1-1). ) And (1-2) may be changed. In this case, it is necessary to change the timing at which the output of the third signal is started in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 accordingly.

(2) The delay time of the signal output from the main control device 71 with respect to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot when the pattern B shifts to the open / close execution mode is not limited to that of the first embodiment.

(2-1) For example, the delay time may be set as the time until the timing in the middle of the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 32a is common. More specifically, the delay time is defined as the time until the timing in the middle of the last opening time of the large winning opening 32a in the common section or the timing in the middle of the waiting time between the last opening time and the immediately preceding opening time. May be set.

Further, in the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the delay time elapses, or may end when the delay time elapses, and the common section may end after the delay time elapses. It may be configured to end by the timing of ending, it may be configured to end at the timing when the common section ends, or it may be configured to end after the common section ends. However, considering that among the common section of the large winning opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is the easiest for the player to pay attention to, after the common effect is completed. Alternatively, it is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started at the end timing thereof.

(2-2) The delay time may be set as the time until the timing after the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 32a is common. For example, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot may be started after the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. However, in order to satisfactorily manage the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode, it is preferable that the signal output is started before the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. Further, in order to be able to start the signal output before the opening of the large winning opening 32a by the long-time mode is started, the long-time mode after the last opening of the large winning opening 32a in the common section is completed. It is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started by the time the opening of the big winning opening 32a is started.

More specifically, it is a conditional jackpot after the timing when the last opening round of opening the large winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is completed and before the timing when the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. It is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c is started. In particular, in the configuration in which the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the open / close execution mode of the pattern B according to the short-time mode executed from the start timing is the same as the open / close execution mode of the pattern A, after the common section is completed. It is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is started during the waiting time until the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. By the way, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened according to the short-time mode executed from the start timing is the same as the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, the delay time as in the above embodiment. May be applied to the configuration in which is set, or may be applied to the configuration of (1-1), (1-2) or (2-1) above.

Further, in the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the common section ends, or may end at the timing when the common section ends, and a delay time elapses after the common section ends. It may be configured to end by, it may be configured to end when the delay time has elapsed, or it may be configured to end after the delay time has elapsed. However, among the common section of the grand prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is the easiest for the player to pay attention to, and the next easiest to pay attention to is the grand prize. Considering the port 32a, the common section ends at the same time as the common effect, or the common section ends after the common effect ends, and then a signal from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. It is preferable that the output is started.

(2-3) Further, in the second embodiment, the start timing of the notification in the data counter DC when the pattern B shifts to the open / close execution mode is set by a common effect, a common section, or a long-time mode. It may be changed as (2-1) or (2-2) in relation to the section where the opening of 32a is performed. In this case, it is necessary to change the delay time measured by the hall computer HC accordingly.

(2-4) Further, in the third embodiment, the start timing of the notification in the data counter DC when the pattern B shifts to the open / close execution mode is set to a large winning opening by a common effect, a common section, or a long-time mode. It may be changed as (2-1) or (2-2) in relation to the section where the opening of 32a is performed. In this case, it is necessary to change the timing at which the output of the second signal is started in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 accordingly.

(3) Signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot at the timing when the common section ends in the open / close execution mode of pattern A and the open / close execution mode of pattern B as in the first embodiment. In the configuration in which is started, the common effect may end before the timing, or the common effect may end after the timing. However, considering that among the common section of the large winning opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is the easiest for the player to pay attention to, the common effect is the above timing. It is preferable that the configuration ends at the same timing or at a timing earlier than that.

Further, another pattern of the end timing of the common effect as described above may be applied to the second embodiment and the third embodiment.

(4) In the first embodiment, even if the delay time of the signal output is different between the plurality of types of open / close execution modes that are subject to the delay of the signal output to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. Good. For example, in the open / close execution mode in which the big winning opening 32a is opened for a long time after the common section, as in the open / close execution mode of the pattern B, the open / close execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A It is conceivable that the section in which the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed in a short time mode is shorter than the opening / closing execution mode in which the high frequency support mode is set after the common section, such as the execution mode. In this case, in the former opening / closing execution mode, it is preferable to output the external output at a timing before the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode, whereas in the latter opening / closing execution mode, for example, a special deviation result is obtained. It may be preferable to delay the external output until the ending of the open / close execution mode is started in order to standardize the operation mode with the open / close execution mode triggered by the above. In such a case, it is preferable to prepare a first delay time for the former open / close execution mode and a second delay time for the latter open / close execution mode.

Further, the delay time of the signal output to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot may be different between the open / close execution mode of the pattern B and the open / close execution mode of the pattern C. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, the signal is output before the section in which the opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is performed 16 times ends and the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, the section in which the opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is performed 18 times ends and the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. The signal output may be started before the signal output is started.

Further, the delay time is not limited to the configuration in which two types are set, and may be a configuration in which three types or four or more types are set. Further, the delay time may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with the type of open / close execution mode to be delayed of the external output, or the delay time may be set for each predetermined combination. May be good.

(5) In the second embodiment, the period from the start timing to the timing at which the notification at the data counter DC is started is between a plurality of types of open / close execution modes that are subject to the delay of notification at the data counter DC. May be different as in (4) above. In this case, when both the first signal and the second signal are received (that is, step S1706), the second signal is not received and both the first signal and the third signal are received. It is preferable that the delay time is set differently depending on the case (that is, step S1708).

Further, in the second embodiment, the start timing of notification by the data counter DC may be different between the open / close execution mode of the pattern B and the open / close execution mode of the pattern C. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, the data counter is set before the section in which the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed 16 times in the short-time mode ends and the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. While the notification in the DC is started, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, the section in which the opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is performed 18 times ends, and the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode starts. It may be configured that the notification by the data counter DC is started before the notification is started.

However, in the configuration in which the type of opening / closing execution mode is identified by the hall computer HC by combining the outputs of a plurality of types of signals as in the second embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B and the opening / closing execution of pattern C are executed. It is necessary to newly add a configuration related to the signal output so that the mode can be distinguished. As a specific configuration that can be identified, a configuration in which the output start timing of the second signal is different depending on the type of each open / close execution mode can be considered. In addition, the number of external terminals and the number of signal lines connecting the external terminals to the hall computer HC will increase, but the pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine 10 have a one-to-one correspondence with each type of opening / closing execution mode. A configuration in which a signal path to and from the hall computer HC is provided is conceivable. Further, in the configuration in which the first to third signals are output when the open / close execution mode is started, the output timings of those signals are different at a level at which the reception order can be recognized by the hall computer HC, and the types of open / close execution modes It is conceivable that the output order of the signals is changed according to the above.

Further, in the third embodiment, the period from the start timing to the timing at which the notification at the data counter DC is started is between a plurality of types of open / close execution modes that are subject to the delay of notification at the data counter DC. The configurations may be different as in (4) above.

(6) In the first embodiment, in order to output not only the information indicating that the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is in the open / close execution mode but also the information indicating that the external terminal 81c is in the high frequency support mode. It may be a terminal used for. For example, in the case of a game state transition mode in which the high frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode of the pattern B, the external output opens / closes when the external output is started in the middle of the open / close execution mode of the pattern B. The configuration may be continued even after the end of the execution mode, and may be continued during the high frequency support mode. Further, for example, in the case of the transition mode of the gaming state in which the high frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode of the pattern A, the external output is started in the middle of the open / close execution mode of the pattern A. May be continued even after the end of the open / close execution mode, and may be continued during the high frequency support mode.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the low-accuracy jackpot result A and the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A may be configured so that external output is not performed regardless of the type of support mode when the game result is obtained. That is, in the case of a game result in which the degree of advantage of a specific element is not shifted from disadvantage to advantage with the execution of the specific game state in between, or the specific game state in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is low. In the case of a game result in which the degree of advantage of a specific element cannot be shifted from disadvantage to advantage across the execution of, the external output may not be performed. In this configuration, even if the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is executed triggered by any of the special deviation result, the low accuracy jackpot result A, and the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A in the high frequency support mode, the opening / closing is performed. It is possible to make the player predict which game result was triggered after the execution mode.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, as a transition mode of the gaming state, if a low probability jackpot result is obtained during the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode, but the low probability is set during the low probability mode. If a big hit result is obtained, a transition mode in which the low frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode may be set. In this case, in the first embodiment, in the former, external output is performed through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot during the open / close execution mode, but in the latter, the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is performed during the open / close execution mode. It may be configured so that the external output is not performed through. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the former may be configured such that the data counter DC is notified during the open / close execution mode, but the latter may not be notified at the data counter DC during the open / close execution mode.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the specific element or specific means for varying the degree of advantage of the player after the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to the support mode configuration, and may be the winning / losing lottery mode. Good.

In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode, the special winning device can be won or the winning is likely to occur, and the opening / closing which is advantageous for the player without going through the winning / losing lottery based on the winning of the special winning device. At least of the configuration in which the external output is selectively performed, the configuration in which the notification in the data counter DC is selectively performed, and the configuration in which the registration in the management data is selectively performed, with respect to the configuration for shifting to the execution mode. Either may be applied.

For example, the first mode in which the special winning device can be won or the winning is likely to occur after the opening / closing execution mode, and the second mode in which the special winning device cannot be won or the winning is unlikely to occur after the opening / closing execution mode. In the configuration in which the mode is set, when the first mode is set after the open / close execution mode, the external output through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot as in the first embodiment is output during the open / close execution mode. However, when the second mode is set after the open / close execution mode, even if the trigger of the transition is a big hit result, the external output may not be performed during the open / close execution mode. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the former may be configured such that the data counter DC is notified during the open / close execution mode, but the latter may not be notified at the data counter DC during the open / close execution mode.

In addition, the special winning device has an advantage that the game ball that has won the special winning device can pass through and the opening / closing execution mode is changed to the opening / closing execution mode based on the passing of the special winning device. Disadvantages that allow the winning game balls to pass and do not cause a transition to the open / close execution mode even if they pass, and a distribution passage that distributes the game balls that have won the special winning device to either advantageous or disadvantageous Alternatively, a distribution device may be provided so that the distribution mode of the game ball can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the mode in which the expectation of granting the predetermined privilege is relatively high is the opening of the large winning opening 32a in the long-time mode, and the expectation of granting the predetermined privilege is relatively high. The lower aspect is not limited to the configuration in which the large winning opening 32a is opened by the short-time aspect, and is optional.

For example, a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 to 15) when a prize is awarded to the large prize opening 32a and a prize ball when a prize is generated to the large prize opening 32a. A configuration may be configured in which a relatively small number (for example, one or two) of small payout modes is set. In this case, in the first embodiment, for example, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, the section of the low payout mode is shifted to the section of the high payout mode after the section of the low payout mode has elapsed, and the section of the low payout mode is started. The external output may be performed later through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot by the end of the section of the multi-payment mode or the start of the section of the multi-payment mode. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the notification in the data counter DC is sent after the section of the low payout mode is started and before the section of the high payout mode ends or before the section of the high payout mode is started. It may be a configuration to be performed.

Further, for example, a plurality of variable prize devices having different numbers of prize balls when a prize is generated are provided as described above, and a variable prize device corresponding to a small payout mode is selected as an opening target to open and close the pattern A. The mode may be configured to perform the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B by changing the opening target from the variable winning device corresponding to the small payout mode to the variable winning device corresponding to the large payout mode.

(11) In the first embodiment, in order to make the hall computer HC recognize that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot during the opening / closing execution mode satisfying a predetermined condition The configuration is such that the signal is output from the main control device 71, but the present invention is not limited to this, and basically the signal is output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. , The signal output may be stopped during the open / close execution mode that satisfies the predetermined conditions. Even with this configuration, it is possible to recognize that the hall computer HC is in the open / close execution mode. The configuration of such a signal output may be applied to the signal output of the support mode system. Further, the configuration of the signal output may be applied to the output of the first to third signals in the second embodiment and the third embodiment.

(12) In the open / close execution mode of the pattern D, the timing at which the external output is started through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is not limited to that in the first embodiment, for example, the standby for the opening. The external output may be started when a predetermined time elapses, or the external output may be started when the waiting time for the opening elapses, and the opening of the first large winning opening 32a starts. The external output may be started when this is done. Further, the start timing of the external output is set to the start timing of the external output from the jackpot external terminal 81a in the open / close execution mode of patterns A to C or the start timing of the external output from the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode. It may be applied to. Further, in the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the timing at which the data counter DC starts the notification in the open / close execution mode of the pattern D may be changed as described above.

(13) In the first embodiment, as a specific configuration for delaying the external output through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot, instead of the configuration for measuring the delay time from the start of the open / close execution mode. For example, when it is determined that the condition such as whether the opening of the large winning opening 32a of the reference number of times is started, is being opened, or is finished is satisfied during the opening / closing execution mode, and the condition is satisfied. In addition, the external output may be started through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot. Even in this case, it is possible to delay the external output through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot.

For example, in the open / close execution mode of the pattern B, it is determined whether or not the opening round according to the last short-time mode included in the common section is completed, and if it is completed, the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is used. The output may be started, and instead, it is determined whether or not it is the timing immediately before the opening round according to the first long-time mode is started, and if it is the timing, it is for a conditional jackpot. The configuration may be such that the external output is started through the external terminal 81c.

Further, for example, it is the timing when the measurement of the waiting time for the ending is started in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A in which the support mode of the electric accessory 34a becomes the high frequency support mode after the end, or the waiting time for the ending is in progress. Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether it is the timing when the measurement of the waiting time for the ending is finished, and to start the external output through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot at the timing.

(14) The type of the opening / closing execution mode selected according to the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed may be different, and the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 may have different types. The hold information may be acquired separately for the occurrence of a prize, and the type of open / close execution mode selected may be different due to the difference in the conditions that triggered the acquisition of the hold information. In such a configuration, the time for which the common section continues may differ between the case of shifting to the open / close execution mode in the first situation and the case of shifting to the open / close execution mode in the second situation.

When the above configuration is applied to the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 determines whether it is the first situation or the second situation, and the delay time corresponding to each is determined. It is preferable to start the signal output through the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot at the elapsed timing. Further, when the above configuration is applied to each of the above embodiments, the notification start timing in the data counter DC may be different depending on each of the first situation and the second situation. For example, when applied to the second embodiment, the output mode of the first to third signals from the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 is the same, and it is pachinko whether it is the first situation or the second situation. It can be recognized by the hall computer HC according to the signal output from the machine 10. Then, the hall computer HC may be configured to set the delay time until the start of notification in the data counter DC according to the result of determining which of the first situation and the second situation.

(15) In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an external terminal in a one-to-one correspondence with the transition mode of the gaming state, and the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer HC are provided. The signal path between them may be provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the transition mode of the gaming state. In this case, the number of signal paths increases as compared with the second embodiment and the third embodiment, but the hall computer HC can individually recognize each transition mode.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, when the game result is the low probability jackpot result A, and when the situation resulting in the game result is the low frequency support mode, the game times of the end reference number of times are performed after the open / close execution mode. It is configured not to shift to the high frequency support mode that continues until it is digested, but it is not limited to this, and even in the low frequency support mode, it continues until the end reference number of game times is digested. It may be configured to shift to the frequency support mode. In this case, in relation to the special deviation result, if any of the jackpot results is obtained, a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the special deviation result will occur.

Further, when the low probability jackpot result A is obtained, instead of opening the grand prize opening 32a according to the short-time mode in each of the above embodiments, the product time of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number during the round game The large winning opening 32a may be opened for the same, substantially the same as, or the same time as the above. Even in this case, if any of the jackpot results is obtained, a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the special off result will occur.

By the way, the opening / closing execution mode when the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained or the opening / closing execution mode when another unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained is the same as or the same as the case where the above-mentioned low-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained. The variable winning device 32 may be configured to have a similar mode in appearance of operation. Further, the configuration may be such that these jackpot results are likely to occur in the high frequency support mode or in the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode. For example, in a configuration in which the holding information acquired for the occurrence of a prize is distinguished between the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and the distribution destination of the jackpot result is different, the holding related to the upper operating port 33 is held. In the information, each of the jackpot results is not set as a distribution destination, and in the hold information related to the lower operating port 34, each of the jackpot results may be set as a distribution destination. In this configuration, the maximum number of round games in the open / close execution mode, which is commonly executed when the low-accuracy jackpot result A and the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result are obtained, is smaller than in other open / close execution modes such as pattern D. (For example, the maximum number of times may be two).

The upper limit number during the round game is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, when the upper limit number is 10, the large winning opening 32a is opened when the opening is performed according to the above embodiment. The time is 6 sec.

(17) In the open / close execution mode of patterns A to C, instead of setting a common section in which the number of times that the variable winning device 32 is continuously opened / closed in a short time mode is the same, any pattern is used. However, there may be a configuration in which an irregular section in which the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32 is randomly determined is set. Even in this case, it is difficult for the player to grasp which pattern of the opening / closing execution mode is in the irregular section, so that the subsequent content is desirable for the player in the irregular section. It is thought that the game will be played with expectations. However, in order to enhance the clarity of the points to be noted when playing the game while expecting that the subsequent contents will be desirable for the player, it is preferable to set the common section as described above. Further, as a common section, a section may be set in which at least one of the opening time and the continuous opening time is slightly different, but it is difficult to identify the section as a whole.

(18) In a plurality of types of open / close execution modes, an irregular period → common section → non-common section or an individual section corresponding to each open / close execution mode may be set, and the common section → irregular section → non-common. A section or an individual section corresponding to each opening / closing execution mode may be set, or a common section → a non-common section or an individual section corresponding to each opening / closing execution mode → a common section may be set. In this case, in the first embodiment, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot is stopped in the common section, and the main to the external terminal 81c for the conditional jackpot in the individual section. It may be configured to output a signal from the control device 71.

(19) There may be a configuration in which there is no common section between the open / close execution mode of the pattern A and the open / close execution mode of the pattern B, and the operation of the variable winning device 32 is different as a whole. However, when the low-accuracy jackpot result A, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A, and the special deviation result are obtained, the open / close execution mode of the pattern A is executed to execute the pattern. When the opening / closing execution mode of A is executed, the player plays the game while expecting that the game result is advantageous to him / her.

(20) Instead of the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode in the opening / closing number specified mode is executed in the special deviation result, the opening / closing execution mode in the round number specified mode may be executed. In this case, the maximum number of round games executed in the round number specified mode corresponding to the special deviation result may be the same as that of the other round number specified modes.

(21) The maximum number of round games executed in the specified number of rounds mode may be notified. Even if the notification is made, it is difficult to know which jackpot result is the trigger because the maximum number of round games in the round number regulation mode corresponding to the jackpot result is the same in the configuration of the above embodiment. can do.

Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of round games is notified as described above, the round number regulation mode is also executed in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the special deviation result or the jackpot result that causes the transition of the game state similar to the special deviation result. Even if the above notification is given, it is difficult to know which game result is the trigger by setting the maximum number of round games to be the same as the other round number regulation modes. Can be.

(22) Instead of the configuration in which the maximum number of game balls are set to be won in the large winning opening 32a as the ending condition of the round game, for example, the variable winning device 32 is provided with an ending trigger. A configuration in which a ball can be entered into the end trigger when the elapsed time of the round game reaches a predetermined elapsed time, and a configuration in which the round game ends when a game ball enters the end trigger. May be.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the number of prizes and the duration of the variable winning device 32 from the start timing of the round game are set as the end condition of the round game, for example, the round game is started and the large winning opening 32a is entered. The configuration may be such that the number of winnings and the duration of the variable winning device 32 after the first winning is set as the end condition.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the large winning opening 32a is closed at the end of the round game, the transition of the round game may occur while the large winning opening 32a is open.

(23) At least a part of the plurality of types of round number regulation modes may be configured such that the maximum number of round games is different. In this case, the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed and the opening and closing mode of each time may be visually the same between the round number specified modes in which the upper limit number of round games is different.

(24) The number of stages in which the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a changes during the round game is not limited to two stages, and may be three or more stages. Further, the large winning opening 32a may not be opened a plurality of times during the round game, and the large winning opening 32a may always be opened only once in one round game.

Further, the variable winning device 32 can switch between a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is not possible and an open state in which the winning of the game ball is possible, but the game can be won. The configuration may be such that the winning probability of the game ball flowing down the area is extremely low and the winning probability of the game ball is dramatically higher than that of the state. Further, the variable winning device 32 has a state in which the winning of the game ball is possible and the winning of the game ball is expected to occur with the first probability, and the probability that the winning of the game ball is expected to occur more than in the state. There may be a configuration in which it is possible to switch to a state in which the winning of the game ball is expected to occur with a high second probability.

Further, the switching of the above states may not be performed through the operation of the opening / closing door 32b, but may be performed through the displacement of the variable winning device 32 itself.

(25) The same opening mode is executed for each opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a, but a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes in which the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a are different may be set. For example, when the first game result and the second game result in which the setting modes of the game states after the execution of the open / close execution mode are different from each other, there is a possibility that any of the above-mentioned plurality of types of open / close execution modes is selected. However, there may be a configuration in which the probability that the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing number is a specific opening / closing number is selected differs between the case of the first game result and the case of the second game result. In this case, a short-time mode may be selected as the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a each time. According to the configuration, the content of the privilege given to the player during the opening / closing execution mode is made to be the same, substantially the same, or the same, and the player is made to predict the subsequent content through the control mode of the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible.

(26) The opening / closing number of the large winning opening 32a and the setting pattern of the opening mode in the opening / closing execution mode of each pattern are not limited to those in each of the above embodiments, and the actions individually described in each of the above embodiments. It is optional as long as it can produce at least one of the effects.

Further, the upper limit number of each round game is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and is arbitrary as long as it can achieve at least one of the effects described individually in each of the above embodiments. Is. Further, the upper limit number may be different depending on the type of the round number specified mode, or the upper limit number may be different between the round games of the same round number specified mode.

Further, the opening mode according to the short-time mode is not limited to a mode in which the variable winning device 32 is not substantially won, and the time is equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and the firing cycle of the game ball × The configuration may be set to a time of n (n = 1, 2, or 3) or less. Further, although the variable winning device 32 may be substantially won by making the opening duration longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, the opening duration is the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number during the round game. It may be a mode shorter than the product of and the mode may be the same. Even in this case, in a situation where the large winning opening 32a is opened in a short time mode, the possibility that the maximum number of winnings in the round game will occur for the large winning opening 32a is reduced.

(27) In a round game in which only the large winning opening 32a is opened in a short time mode, the upper limit is replaced with the configuration in which the upper limit of the number of game balls set for the round game is substantially not won. The configuration may be such that a number of game balls can be won. For example, the opening duration of the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a executed in the round game is set to be longer than the firing cycle of the game ball (for example, in the range of 0.6 sec to 64 sec), and the opening is continued. The product of the time and the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a according to the opening mode is the same as or substantially the same as the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of round games, or 1 for the product. The value shall be double or more and less than 2 times, or 1 times or more and less than 3 times. In this case, depending on the flow mode of the game balls in the game area, the upper limit number of game balls may not be won or the prize may be generated in the round game.

Further, as in the relationship between the open / close execution mode in the case of the low accuracy jackpot result B and the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result B and the open / close execution mode in the case of the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B in each of the above embodiments, a plurality of consecutive rounds. In the game, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 32a according to the short-time mode executed in these multiple round games is the same, but the distribution of the number of times of opening and closing in each round game is different. Depending on the flow mode of the game balls of the above, a configuration may be applied in which the upper limit number of game balls may not be won or the prize may be generated in the round game.

Specifically, in the other open / close execution mode, the number of times of opening / closing in the short-time mode of the first R is set to be larger than that in the open / close execution mode of one, but the number of times of opening / closing in the short-time mode of the second R is set to be smaller. Further, there is a high probability that the maximum number of game balls will be won in the 1st round in the other opening / closing execution mode, and the maximum number of game balls will be won in at least one of the 1st and 2nd rounds in the other opening / closing execution mode. The probability of occurrence of the above is low or substantially impossible, and the winning of the upper limit number of game balls in the second R in the other opening / closing execution mode may be substantially impossible. In this case, if the upper limit number of game balls is won in the middle of the 1st round in the other opening / closing execution mode, the total number of opening / closing times in the 1st and 2nd rounds of the opening / closing execution mode is calculated. Since it is less than the total number of times of opening and closing in the first and second R of the opening / closing execution mode of one of the above, the player can recognize that the opening / closing execution mode is the other opening / closing execution mode. It becomes. This makes it possible to diversify the modes for predicting which game result is.

Incidentally, one of the open / close execution modes may correspond to the low accuracy jackpot result B, and the other open / close execution mode may correspond to the implicit high accuracy jackpot result B.

(28) As the short-time mode, a plurality of types of short-time modes may be set so that the exact opening duration is different, but the apparent operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is the same. For example, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low probability jackpot result A and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special deviation result have the same apparent operation mode of the variable winning device 32, but in each opening / closing of the big winning opening 32a. The type of short-time mode selected may be different. Further, such a configuration may be applied to a medium-time mode or a long-time mode.

(29) In addition to or in place of a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening modes of the large winning opening 32a are set by different opening durations, a large winning prize is obtained by differently opening the large winning opening 32a such as half-opening or full-opening. A configuration may be configured in which a plurality of types of opening modes of the mouth 32a are set.

(30) The degree of advantage of the gaming state that shifts after the open / close execution mode may be defined by the difference in the number of continuations of the high probability mode. Further, the degree of advantage of the gaming state that shifts after the opening / closing execution mode is not defined by the winning / losing lottery mode, but may be defined by the presence / absence of the high-frequency support mode and the difference in the number of continuations.

(31) Instead of the configuration in which the combination of common symbols is always stopped and displayed in the game times in which the open / close execution mode of patterns A to C is performed, the stop result is randomly selected. The configuration may be such that it is difficult to grasp whether the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the game result. In this case, the randomly selected stop result may not include a mode in which the same combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines.

(32) Instead of the configuration in which the same common effect is always executed in the open / close execution mode of pattern A and the open / close execution mode of pattern B, any of a plurality of types of effects may be executed. In this case, the plurality of types of effects may be executed completely randomly.

(33) When the execution condition of the premium effect is the 1st round of the round number regulation mode and the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a is a short-time mode, one winning of the large winning opening 32a occurs. Instead of the configuration of, the execution condition may be that a plurality of prizes are generated, or the execution condition may be that the lottery is executed in the wake of winning the large prize opening 32a in the situation. .. Further, as an execution condition of the premium effect, a condition that the high probability mode is set after the open / close execution mode may be added. In this case, the premium effect is an effect indicating that the high probability mode is confirmed. Further, the execution mode of the premium effect is arbitrary. For example, the pattern display device 41 may not execute the effect, but the display lamp unit 58 or the speaker unit 59 may execute the effect.

In addition, the combination of the low-accuracy jackpot result B and the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B do not differ in the number of times of opening and closing of the first R in the round number specified mode, but the low-accuracy jackpot result B. And the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result B may be configured so that the number of times of opening and closing is different.

(34) The combination of the pattern of each opening / closing execution mode and the pattern of the setting mode of the gaming state after the execution of the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and is arbitrary. For example, in the case of a special deviation result, the same or similar opening / closing execution mode as that of either pattern B or pattern C may be executed.

(35) In the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2, the type for defining the game state after the opening / closing execution mode is executed, such as the low-accuracy jackpot result, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result. The lottery is performed, and a counter for selecting the opening / closing execution mode may be provided separately. In this case, in the table in which the counter and the pattern of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the numerical information of the counter are associated with each other, the opening mode of the large winning opening 32a from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode to at least the intermediate timing is specified. The configuration may be such that the probability of becoming an aspect differs depending on the content to be executed thereafter.

Further, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided, and the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 may be used to distribute all the game results.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is used to draw a lottery for the occurrence of a special deviation result, a counter dedicated to the special deviation result is separately provided to determine the occurrence of a special deviation result using the counter. It may be configured. In addition, the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed may be different, and a plurality of types of special deviation results may be set. However, even in this case, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to each special deviation result, the large winning opening 32a is opened by the short-time mode in each of the above-described embodiments, so that the large winning opening 32a is substantially large. It is preferable that the winning opening 32a is not won.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the probability of a special deviation result is lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, but instead, the probability of a special deviation result is the same or substantially the same in both modes. The configuration may be such that the high probability mode has a higher probability of producing a special deviation result, and the high probability mode may have a configuration in which a special deviation result does not occur.

(36) The hold information relating to the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the holding information relating to the winning of the lower operating port 34 are stored separately, and the holding information relating to the winning of the lower operating port 34 has priority. A configuration that is digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which the pending information relating to the winning of the upper operating port 33 is preferentially digested may be applied.

Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 34 are left and right. The configuration may be arranged side by side, or both of these operating ports may be arranged side by side at an angle. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 55, both operating ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the winning of the first operating port or the winning of the second operating port can be aimed at.

Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 43 has a first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information has been acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, and the acquisition based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. A second display area may be provided to display the result of the hit / fail determination of the held information. In this case, the variable display of the pattern in the first display area is based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is subject to the hit / fail judgment or based on the hit / miss judgment. Is started, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game is terminated. In addition, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area prior to the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 or based on the fact that the winning / failing judgment is made. At the same time as the start, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game is terminated.

(37) The player depends on the case where the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 33 is the target of the winning / failing judgment and the case where the holding information related to the winning of the lower operating port 34 is the target of the winning / failing judgment. May be configured in which the profits obtained are different. For example, when the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 33 is the target of the winning / failing determination, the game result is distributed as in the above embodiment, but the holding information related to the winning of the lower operating port 34 is performed. If is the target of the winning / failing judgment and the jackpot is won, the configuration may be such that the result is assigned to either the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C.

Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided as in the above embodiment, the number of operating ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

(38) The symbol display device 41 or a dedicated display may be configured to notify the number of executions of the predetermined opening / closing execution mode, the number of executions of the game times, and the high frequency support mode. In this case, instead of or in addition to the configuration related to the external output in each of the above embodiments, the control device on the sub side (audio emission control device 72 in each of the above embodiments) or dedicated when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. A configuration in which the signal output timing to the display of the above is delayed, or a configuration in which no signal is output even if the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode under a predetermined situation may be applied. Further, for the first output mode in which the signal output is performed in the same manner as the external output to the jackpot external terminal 81a in the first embodiment, and for the open / close execution mode in the first embodiment. The second output mode in which the signal output is performed in the same manner as the external output mode to the external terminal 81b, and the external output mode to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the first embodiment are the same. The third output mode in which the signal output is performed in the embodiment is stored in advance in the program of the main control device 71, and the manager of the game hall or the like can perform any of the above output modes through the operation of the predetermined manual operation unit. It may be configured so that it can be selected.

Further, a storage device for storing the duration of the open / close execution mode and the duration of the high frequency support mode in a predetermined mode according to the signal output from the main control device 71 and other control devices is installed. The above configuration may be applied to the configuration. It is considered that the storage device is used when adjusting the nail according to the ejection of the game ball, and it is possible to output a signal suitable for managing the adjustment of the nail.

(39) Display control based on the command output from the main control device 71 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 111 is controlled by the voice emission control device 72 based on the command output from the main control device 71. The device 111 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 72. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 111 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 71, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 71. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 72 and the configuration of the command output from the voice emission control device 72 to the display control device 111 are also arbitrary.

(40) The device for executing the effect for the game round is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the game round is executed by the operation of the decorative member provided movably. It may be configured that the effect for game rounds is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or the effect for game rounds may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above modes. Good.

(41) In each of the above embodiments, one game rotation in the main display unit 43 is started based on the result of the hit / fail determination in the main control device 71, but the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the fact that the game round is started at a timing before the timing at which the hit / fail judgment is actually performed when the condition for the hit / miss judgment is satisfied in the main control device 71, and the hit / miss judgment is performed thereafter. The configuration may be such that the subsequent display mode, display duration, and stop result in the game round are determined. In this case, when the start timing of the game round is reached, the main control device 71 first transmits a variation command, and then determines whether the game is correct or not, determines the display duration, and determines the type. The command may be transmitted, or the transmission timing of these time commands and type commands may be different.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, the main display unit 43 is configured to display the stop result corresponding to each game result, but instead of this, the main display unit 43 may not be provided, and any game may be provided. Even if it is a result, a common stop result may be displayed on the main display unit 43, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the main display unit 43, resulting in a display from the main display unit 43. The configuration may be such that it is not possible to identify which game result is.

(43) On the display screen G, the game result is clearly indicated separately from the symbols that are variablely displayed (specifically, the symbols that are scrolled and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3) in order to perform the effect for the game round. The pattern (picture) for the purpose may be displayed. For example, on the display screen G, an explicit area corresponding to at least one of an area narrower than the area on which the above-mentioned design for effect is displayed and an area on the veranda is displayed, and at the end of the game round in this explicit area. It may be configured so that the display corresponding to the game result is made. In this case, the display may be performed by a pattern of lighting colors in one section or a plurality of sections, or may be performed by a pattern of characters or patterns that are difficult to identify.

Further, since the display content is similar between the game results, the display may be difficult to recognize except for those who are familiar with the correspondence between the display content and the game result. In this case, it is possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the game result through the display while making it difficult for the player to grasp the game result through the display. Further, in the above-mentioned explicit area, the variable display or the switching display may be performed during the continuation of the game round, and the display is not performed during the game round, but the stop result is displayed when the game round ends. It may be configured to be.

(44) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

For example, as a jackpot state that continues over a predetermined number of game times or over a plurality of game times until a predetermined number of medals or more are paid out based on the winning in the internal lottery. , The first section in which the winning probability of the payout corresponding combination contributing to the payout of medals is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second section in which the winning probability is higher than in the normal gaming state but lower than in the first state. In the configuration having and, the external output indicating the jackpot state may be performed in the first section, and the external output indicating the jackpot state may not be performed in the second section.

Further, in a configuration in which a first jackpot state that continues only in the first section and a second jackpot state that continues only in the second section are set, external output is performed in the first jackpot state. , In the second jackpot state, the external output may not be performed.

In addition, the game machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
Identification to end when a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the judgment result of the transition judgment means being the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the transition of the game state. A first transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the game state to the game state (open / close execution mode), and
When the end condition is satisfied and the specific game state ends, the second transition means (at the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting to a game state different from the previous game state of the specific game state. Function to execute the migration process) and
A recognition means (external terminal plate 81) used to make the management means (hall computer HC) outside the game machine recognize that the transition of the game state has been performed, and
The recognition control means (main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that makes the transition of the gaming state recognizable by the management means or an unrecognizable state that makes it unrecognizable. (Functions for executing the processes of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915) in the MPU 92).
Is equipped with
As a transition mode when the transition determination result may be performed by both the first transition means and the second transition means, the mode during the specific gaming state and the mode of the transition after the specific gaming state Multiple types of migration modes are set so that at least one of them is different.
The recognition control means is a situation in which the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode among the plurality of types of transition modes (for example, the transition mode when the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B is obtained, or the high frequency support mode. In the case of the transition mode when the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained in (1), the recognizable state is set at a specific timing, while the transition mode of the gaming state is the second of the plurality of types of transition modes. In the case of a transition mode (for example, a transition mode when a low probability jackpot result A is obtained, or a transition mode when an unspecified high probability jackpot result A is obtained in a low frequency support mode), at the specific timing. A gaming machine comprising: a setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for maintaining the unrecognizable state without making the recognizable state.

In the game machine of feature A1, when the transition of the game state occurs, the recognition means becomes recognizable, so that the game machine can be well managed in the game hall where many game machines are installed. It will be possible.

In this case, in the case of the first transition mode, the recognizable state is set at a specific timing, while in the case of the second transition mode, the recognizable state is maintained at a specific timing. As a result, it becomes possible to flexibly set the recognizable state in the case of the first transition mode and the case of the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. In this configuration, it is possible to manage the game machine well.

Further, for example, if the management means recognizes that the game state has changed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost, and the game state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit things.

From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the degree of attention to the game.

The "specific timing" includes the start timing of the specific game state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific game state becomes the specific time, and the specific game device operates in the specific game state. The configuration includes a case where the operation of the game device is started or ended a predetermined number of times. Further, in the configuration in which the opening period and the ending period are set in the specific game state, the timing during any of these periods is also included.

Feature A2. The first transition mode is a mode in which a specific degree of advantage becomes advantageous during or after the specific gaming state.
The second transition mode is a mode in which the specific degree of advantage is disadvantageous.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the situation in which the specific advantage degree becomes advantageous is started. On the other hand, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the feature A1 is characterized in that the transition mode is maintained in the unrecognizable state without being in the recognizable state at the specific timing. Game machine.

According to the feature A2, the recognizable state is not set uniformly, but is flexibly set according to the content of a specific degree of advantage of the migration destination. As a result, while making it possible to manage the situation where a specific degree of advantage is advantageous in a game hall or the like, for example, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is a factor of the execution of the management. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

Feature A3. The first transition mode is a mode in which after the specific gaming state, the transition to the first gaming state in which a specific element (support mode) for varying the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous is achieved.
The second transition mode is a mode in which after the specific gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state in which the specific element becomes relatively disadvantageous is performed.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the transition to the first gaming state is performed, while the setting means. The second aspect of the game is described in the feature A1 or A2, wherein the game state is maintained in the unrecognizable state without being made recognizable at the specific timing. Game machine.

According to the feature A3, the recognizable state is not set uniformly, but is flexibly set according to the gaming state after the specific gaming state. As a result, while making it possible to manage the game state after the specific game state well in the game hall, for example, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is eliminated due to the execution of the management. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

The specific element may be configured so that the advantage of the element can be recognized from the operation of the game machine.

Feature A4. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
With
The transition determination means makes the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching mode becomes the high-frequency switching mode as the specific element, while the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching mode is the low-frequency switching mode as the specific element. The gaming machine according to feature A3, which is characterized in that it is in a gaming state.

According to the feature A4, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, it is attempted to manage the frequency of entering the specific ball in the game hall or to illegally open the specific ball. It is possible to monitor the actions to be taken well. Further, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is changed, the player can easily recognize which of the switching modes is. Therefore, in the first transition mode in which the high frequency switching mode is set after the specific game state, the recognition state is set at a specific timing, and in the second transition mode in which the low frequency switching mode is set after the specific game state, the recognition is performed at a specific timing. Even if the distinction is made not to set the possible state, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature A5. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a mode in which the expectation is relatively low (short-time mode) are set.
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode proceed in the relatively low mode, and the appearance mode of the game machine operation is the first transition mode and the second transition mode. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot or is difficult to identify which of the transition modes is involved occurs from the start timing.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting means is the specific one after the start of the low identification section and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the recognizable state is set at the timing, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the unrecognizable state is maintained without making the recognizable state even at the specific timing. The gaming machine according to the feature A3 or A4, which is characterized in that it is to be used.

According to the feature A5, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether a specific element becomes advantageous or disadvantageous after the specific gaming state in the low identification section of the specific gaming state, so that the player is in the specific gaming state in the low identification section. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be in an advantageous state later. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set at least until the timing in the middle of the low identification section, for example, the effect of setting the low identification section is lost due to the game machine management by the management means. There is no. Further, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine It is difficult for management problems to occur. Furthermore, if a specific element becomes advantageous after the specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the first gaming state is performed, so whether or not the specific element becomes advantageous. It is possible to manage the problem well.

Feature A6. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable entry ball provided in the game area and having an opening (large winning opening 32a) formed in a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32) and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) that executes a variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state is set.
A privilege granting means (payout device 77 and a payout control device 78) that grants a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the opening of the variable ball entry means.
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means.
As a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the expected degree of entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means in the open state is relative. A high expectation mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so as to be high or low.
In the specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed as a section from the start timing to at least the intermediate timing. In addition to proceeding with the above, a low identification section is configured so that it is impossible or difficult to identify which of the first transition mode and the second transition mode is related to the appearance of the operation of the variable ball entry means. Has been
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting means is the specific one after the start of the low identification section and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the recognizable state is set at the timing, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the unrecognizable state is maintained without making the recognizable state even at the specific timing. The gaming machine according to the feature A3 or A4, which is characterized in that it is to be used.

According to the feature A6, in the low identification section of the specific gaming state, it is difficult to recognize whether the specific element becomes advantageous or disadvantageous after the specific gaming state, so that the player is in the specific gaming state in the low identification section. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be in an advantageous state later. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set at least until the timing in the middle of the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section may be lost due to the game machine management by the management means. Absent. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the exit management of the game machine , The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, if a specific element becomes advantageous after the specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the first gaming state is performed, so whether or not the specific element becomes advantageous. It is possible to manage the problem well.

In addition, as the specific game state, it is configured to have a round game which is controlled so as to be terminated when the number of balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit, and further, the round game. In a configuration in which a specific game state corresponding to a round game is set, which is terminated based on the execution of a predetermined maximum number of times.
In the high expectation mode, during the period in which the variable ball entry control according to the mode is executed, the maximum number of game balls are likely to enter the variable ball entry means to be controlled. In contrast to the aspect
In the low expectation mode, the upper limit number of game balls does not enter the variable ball entry means to be controlled during the period when the variable ball entry control according to the embodiment is executed. The configuration may be such that it is unlikely to occur.

Further, in order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering the game ball between the low expectation mode and the high expectation mode, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of the variable ball entry control is in the open state. May be set to a period shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Further, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of the variable ball entry control is in the open state is a period equal to or longer than the launch cycle of the game ball, and the launch cycle of the game ball × n (n is greater than the upper limit number). Small number) The configuration may be set to the following period. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the above n may be any number of "1", "2" or "3".

Feature A7. In the low identification section, a low identification effect of a mode that is visually indistinguishable or difficult to identify whether it is the specific gaming state according to the first transition mode or the specific gaming state according to the second transition mode is produced. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing an effect determination process for an opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 and a display control device 111) to be performed by the execution means (design display device 41).
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting means is at the specific timing after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the recognizable state is set, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the unrecognizable state is maintained without making the recognizable state even at the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature A6, which is characterized in that.

According to the feature A7, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the specific element becomes advantageous or disadvantageous after the specific game state in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, so that the player operates the variable ball entry means. The game is performed while visually recognizing the mode and the low identification effect and expecting that the state will be advantageous after the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect may be lost due to the game machine management by the management means. Absent. In addition, since the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low while the low identification effect is being performed, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game is played. It is difficult for problems to occur in managing the launch of the aircraft. Furthermore, when a specific element becomes advantageous after the specific game state, the recognizable state is set after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first game state is performed. It is possible to manage whether or not a specific factor is advantageous.

Feature A8. The setting means sets the state of the recognition means in the first recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state has been performed or in the first unrecognizable state in which the management means cannot recognize. It is the first setting means to do
Further, the recognition control means is used for the recognition in the second recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the first gaming state has been performed or in the second unrecognizable state in which the management means cannot recognize. Any one of features A3 to A7, which comprises a second setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S516, S905, and S915 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the means. The game machine described in.

According to the feature A8, the management means can distinguish between the transition to the specific gaming state and the transition to the first gaming state, and thus the specific game. It is possible to manage whether or not the game is in the state, and it is also possible to manage whether or not the transition to the first game state has been performed without triggering the end of the specific game state. Become.

In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, if the first recognizable state is not set in any of the transition modes, the first is 2 When the recognizable state is set, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific game state. On the other hand, the configuration of the above feature A3 is provided, and when the state shifts to the first game state after the specific game state, the first recognizable state is set in advance, so that the above management can be performed satisfactorily. Can be.

Feature A9. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
With
The shift determination means makes the determination based on the fact that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion, and also shifts. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high or low.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
In the first transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode shifts to the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode is set. And
In the second transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode shifts to the gaming state in which the low frequency switching mode is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is characterized in that.

The type of transition determination mode can be indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the game machine, whereas the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is different, so that the switching mode is switched. It is difficult to recognize which mode is. Under such circumstances, in the feature A9, the recognizable state is not set in relation to the transition determination mode, but the recognizable state is set in relation to the switching mode. As a result, the player is made to predict which of the transition determination modes after the specific game state is used, so that the effect of increasing the attention to the game is not lost, and the player enters the specific ball entry section in the game hall. It is possible to manage the frequency of balls and monitor the act of illegally opening a specific ball entry part.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature A10. The first transition mode and the second transition mode are both transition modes performed with the same transition determination result (for example, unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A) as a trigger, while the first transition mode is predetermined. The transition mode is performed based on the same transition determination result in the gaming state, and the second transition mode is based on the same transition determination result in a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, which is a transition mode to be performed.

According to the feature A10, even if the same transition determination result is obtained, the subsequent transition mode of the gaming state is different, and it is possible to diversify the game without increasing the types of the transition determination result. Further, even in this case, the recognizable state is set in a flexible manner according to the transition mode, instead of uniformly distinguishing and setting the recognizable state based on the transition determination result. As a result, the game machine can be managed through the setting of the recognizable state without losing the above effect.

Feature A11. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a mode in which the expectation is relatively low (short-time mode) are set.
As a determination result of the transition determination means, the transition to the specific gaming state occurs in the relatively low mode, but when the specific gaming state ends, the same game as the previous gaming state of the specific gaming state. A partial transition result (special deviation result) that returns to the state is set,
The recognition control means maintains the unrecognizable state without making the recognizable state when the game state shift occurs based on the partial shift result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the mode in the specific game state based on the appearance of the game machine operation from the start timing of the specific game state to at least the intermediate timing as the partial transition result. Or, it is configured so that a low identification section that is difficult to identify occurs.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10.

According to the feature A11, since the partial transition result is set, the influence on the transition rate of the gaming state excluding the specific gaming state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the privilege to the player, and the specific gaming state is suppressed. It becomes possible to use the transition to the production as a production. Further, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, a low identification section that cannot be distinguished or is difficult to distinguish from the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured, so that the specific gaming state is sandwiched in the low identification section. The game is played while predicting whether the transition of the game state will occur. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set at least until the timing in the middle of the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section by the game machine management by the management means is not lost. Further, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine It is difficult for management problems to occur.

Feature A12. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable entry ball provided in the game area and having an opening (large winning opening 32a) formed in a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32) and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) that executes a variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state is set.
A privilege granting means (payout device 77 and a payout control device 78) that grants a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the opening of the variable ball entry means.
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means.
As a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the expected degree of entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means in the open state is relative. A high expectation mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so as to be high or low.
Further, as a determination result of the transition determination means, the transition to the specific gaming state that ends after the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed a specific number of times occurs, but the specific gaming state ends. In some cases, a partial transition result (special deviation result) for returning to the same gaming state as the previous gaming state of the specific gaming state is set.
The recognition control means maintains the unrecognizable state without making the recognizable state when the game state shift occurs based on the partial shift result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the mode of the specific game state based on the fact that the operation mode of the variable ball entering means from the start timing of the specific game state to at least an intermediate timing results in the partial transition result. It is configured so that there are low identification sections that are difficult to identify.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10.

According to the feature A12, since the partial transition result is set, the influence on the transition rate of the gaming state excluding the specific gaming state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the privilege to the player, and the specific gaming state is suppressed. It becomes possible to use the transition to the production as a production. Further, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, a low identification section that cannot be distinguished or is difficult to distinguish from the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured, so that the specific gaming state is sandwiched in the low identification section. The game is played while predicting whether the transition of the game state will occur. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set at least until the timing in the middle of the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section may be lost due to the game machine management by the management means. Absent. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the exit management of the game machine , The problem is hard to occur.

Feature A13. In the low identification section, a low identification effect of a mode that is visually indistinguishable or difficult to identify whether it is the specific gaming state related to the partial transition result or the specific gaming state related to the second transition mode is executed. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing an effect determination process for an opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 and a display control device 111) to be performed by the means (design display device 41).
The setting means is described in feature A12, wherein when the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means is maintained in the unrecognizable state at least until the end of the low identification effect. Game machine.

According to the feature A13, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect disappears due to the game machine management by the management means. It won't happen. In addition, since the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low while the low identification effect is being performed, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game is played. It is difficult for problems to occur in managing the launch of the aircraft.

Feature A14. A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
With
The shift determination means makes the determination based on the fact that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion, and also shifts. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high or low.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
In the second transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode shifts to the gaming state in which the low frequency switching mode is set. And
The setting means is characterized in that, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means does not set to the recognizable state triggered by the transition of the gaming state. Or the gaming machine according to A13.

The type of transition determination mode can be indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the game machine, whereas the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is different, so that the switching mode is switched. It is difficult to recognize which mode is. Under such circumstances, in the feature A14, the transition determination mode is changed with the specific game state in between, but in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the low frequency switching mode, the recognizable state is triggered by the change. No settings are made. As a result, when a specific gaming state having a low identification section occurs, it is possible to continue the expectation of the player not only in the low identification section but also after the specific gaming state.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature A15. A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific ball entry portion (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
With
The shift determination means makes the determination based on the fact that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion, and also shifts. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high or low.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
In the second transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode shifts to the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode is set. And
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means is the timing after the start of the low identification section and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature A12 or A13, which is set to the recognizable state in the above.

The type of transition determination mode can be indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the game machine, whereas the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is different, so that the switching mode is switched. It is difficult to recognize which mode is. Under such circumstances, in the feature A15, the transition determination mode is changed with the specific gaming state in between, and in the second transition mode in which the switching mode becomes the high frequency switching mode, the game state is changed to the gaming state after the specific gaming state. It is set to the recognizable state at the timing before the migration is performed. This makes it possible to play the game while expecting that it will be in an advantageous state after the specific game state in the low identification section, and manage the frequency of entering the specific ball entry part in the game hall and identify it illegally. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the act of trying to open the ball entry portion.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature A16. The first transition mode is a mode in which the expectation that a predetermined privilege is given during the specific gaming state is relatively high.
The second transition mode is a mode in which the degree of expectation that the predetermined privilege is given during the specific gaming state is relatively low.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the situation in which the predetermined privilege can be granted is started. On the other hand, when the transition mode of the game state is the second transition mode, the features A1 to the feature A1 to the feature A1 to the feature A1 to the feature A1 to the feature A1 The gaming machine according to any one of A15.

According to the feature A16, the recognizable state is not set uniformly, but is flexibly set in relation to the situation in which a predetermined privilege can be given during the specific gaming state. As a result, while making it possible to manage the granting of benefits in a game hall, etc., the effect of setting multiple types of transition modes will not be lost due to the execution of the management. It becomes possible to do.

Feature A17. Based on the fact that the recognition means has grasped that the recognition means is in the recognizable state, the management means performs a predetermined notification by a display means (data counter DC) provided in the game hall corresponding to the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, which is characterized in that it can be used.

According to the feature A17, when a predetermined notification is performed in the game hall, an excellent effect as described above can be obtained.

Feature A18. The game rotation operation is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means based on the condition. Game turn control that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) so that the game turn operation of each game turn is performed in response to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition as one game turn. Means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1001 to S1011 in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 and the display control device 111) and
A function and display for executing the processing of steps S1012 to S1013 in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 for producing the effect for the specific game state in the situation where the specific game state is being executed. Control device 111) and
With
As the notification result, the game rotation control means cannot identify the mode of the transition destination regardless of whether the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. It is provided with a termination means (a function of executing the process of step S1008 in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72) for ending the game rotation operation.
The effect control means for the specific gaming state is at least in the middle of the start timing regardless of whether the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. A feature characterized by being provided with means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1101 to S1110 in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72) for performing an effect in which the mode of the transition destination cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A17.

According to the feature A18, the player grasps whether the transition mode of the game state is the first transition mode or the second transition mode from the notification result of the game rotation operation and the production mode for the specific game state. difficult. As a result, the possibility of playing the game in the specific gaming state is increased while expecting that the first transition mode and the second transition mode are desirable for the player, and the degree of attention to the specific gaming state is improved. Is planned.

Feature A19. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
Identification to end when a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the judgment result of the transition judgment means being the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the transition of the game state. A first transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the game state to the game state (open / close execution mode), and
When the end condition is satisfied and the specific game state ends, the second transition means (at the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting to a game state different from the previous game state of the specific game state. Function to execute the migration process) and
A recognition means (external terminal plate 81) used to make a specific means (hall computer HC) recognize that the transition of the gaming state has been performed, and
The recognition control means (main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means in a recognizable state that makes the transition of the gaming state recognizable by the specific means or an unrecognizable state that makes it unrecognizable. (Functions for executing the processes of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905 and step S915) in the MPU 92).
Is equipped with
As a transition mode when the transition determination result may be performed by both the first transition means and the second transition means, the mode during the specific gaming state and the mode of the transition after the specific gaming state Multiple types of migration modes are set so that at least one of them is different.
The recognition control means is a situation in which the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode among the plurality of types of transition modes (for example, the transition mode when the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B is obtained, or the high frequency support mode. In the case of the transition mode when the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A is obtained in (1), the recognizable state is set at a specific timing, while the transition mode of the gaming state is the second of the plurality of types of transition modes. In the case of a transition mode (for example, a transition mode when a low probability jackpot result A is obtained, or a transition mode when an unspecified high probability jackpot result A is obtained in a low frequency support mode), at the specific timing. A gaming machine comprising: a setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for maintaining the unrecognizable state without making the recognizable state.

In the game machine of the feature A19, when the transition of the game state occurs, the recognition means becomes a recognizable state, so that the game machine can be well managed.

In this case, in the case of the first transition mode, the recognizable state is set at a specific timing, while in the case of the second transition mode, the recognizable state is maintained at a specific timing. As a result, it becomes possible to flexibly set the recognizable state in the case of the first transition mode and the case of the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. In this configuration, it is possible to manage the game machine well.

In addition, for example, if a specific means is made to recognize that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost, and the recognition state is set. It is possible to limit things.

From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the degree of attention to the game.

The "specific timing" includes the start timing of the specific game state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific game state becomes the specific time, and the specific game device operates in the specific game state. The configuration includes a case where the operation of the game device is started or ended a predetermined number of times. Further, in the configuration in which the opening period and the ending period are set in the specific game state, the timing during any of these periods is also included.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the shift of the game state of the shift judgment means. State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
Recognition means used to make the management means (hall computer HC) outside the game machine recognize that the transition of the game state has been performed (in the first embodiment, the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot, the third In the embodiment, the second external terminal 81b) and
A recognition control means (first embodiment) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition of the game state has been performed or an unrecognizable state in which the management means cannot recognize the transition. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment. )When,
Is equipped with
As the transition mode when the determination result of the transition to the specific gaming state is obtained, there are a first section in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low and a relatively high mode. A specific transition mode having a second section to proceed (for example, a transition mode when the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B is obtained) is set.
The mode of transition of the gaming state is specified so that the recognition control means is in the unrecognizable state in at least a part of the first section and is in the recognizable state in at least a part of the second section. Setting means for switching the setting of the recognition means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, in the third embodiment). A gaming machine comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71).

In the game machine of feature B1, the recognition means becomes recognizable when the transition of the game state occurs, so that the game machine can be well managed in the game hall where many game machines are installed. It will be possible. In addition, by setting a specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section occur as the transition mode of the gaming state, the execution of the specific gaming state is produced while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the predetermined privilege. It becomes possible to use it as a game, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, the recognizable state is not uniformly set regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, but the recognizable state and the unrecognizable state are set according to the section to stay. The setting of the recognition means is switched between. As a result, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes a specific transition mode, the recognizable state can be flexibly set, and the game machine management can be performed well in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. Is possible.

Feature B2. The specific transition mode is a mode in which the specific gaming state shifts to a switching-corresponding specific gaming state having the first section and the second section.
The setting means is said to be in the unrecognizable state in at least a part of the first section and in the recognizable state in at least a part of the second section in the switching-corresponding specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the setting of the recognition means is switched.

According to the feature B2, since the specific game state corresponding to the switching is set as the specific game state, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the specific game state. In addition, it becomes possible to satisfactorily manage the game machine in the specific game state corresponding to the switching.

Feature B3. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable entry ball provided in the game area and having an opening (large winning opening 32a) formed in a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32) and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) that executes a variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state is set.
A privilege granting means (payout device 77 and a payout control device 78) that grants a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the opening of the variable ball entry means.
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means.
As a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the expected degree of entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means in the open state is relative. A high expectation mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so as to be high or low.
The first section is a section in which the variable ball entry control is performed according to the low expectation mode, and the second section is a section in which the variable ball entry control is performed according to the high expectation mode. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2.

According to the feature B3, in the first section, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable ball entry means, and in the second section, it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the game can be diversified during the specific game state by using the variable ball entry means. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above feature B2, the recognizable state can be flexibly set depending on whether the operation of the variable ball entry means is used as an effect or is used for the purpose of giving a privilege. By doing so, it becomes possible to satisfactorily manage the gaming machine in the configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state. In addition, for example, in the first section where the production is performed through the operation of the variable ball entry means, emphasis is placed on improving the attention of the game, and in the second section where the frequency of granting benefits to the player is improved, the game machine management. Can be performed well.

Feature B4. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the shift of the game state of the shift judgment means. State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
The recognition means (external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot) used to make the management means (hall computer HC) outside the game machine recognize that the game state has been changed, and
The recognition control means (main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that makes the transition of the gaming state recognizable by the management means or an unrecognizable state that makes it unrecognizable. The function of executing the processes of step S413, step S511, and step S512 in the MPU 92) and
Is equipped with
As the transition mode when the determination result of the transition to the specific gaming state is performed, there are a plurality of types so that at least one of the mode during the specific gaming state and the mode of transition after the specific gaming state is different. Transition mode is set,
When the transition mode of the gaming state is a specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B is obtained), the recognition control means is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. (For example, a transition mode when an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained), the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 is performed by setting means for delaying the timing of setting the recognizable state. A game machine characterized by having a function to execute).

In the game machine of feature B4, when the transition of the game state occurs, the recognition means becomes recognizable, so that the game machine can be well managed in the game hall where many game machines are installed. It will be possible.

In this case, when the transition mode of the gaming state is a specific transition mode, the timing of setting the recognizable state is delayed as compared with the case where the transition mode is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. As a result, it is possible to flexibly set the recognizable state depending on whether the transition mode is a specific transition mode or a predetermined transition mode, and in the configuration in which a plurality of types of transition modes are set as described above, It becomes possible to perform game machine management well.

Further, for example, if the management means recognizes that the game state has changed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost, and the game state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit things. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is not set at all but is delayed, it is still possible to manage the game machine.

Feature B5. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the shift of the game state of the shift judgment means. State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
Recognition means used to make the management means (hall computer HC) outside the game machine recognize that the transition of the game state has been performed (in the first embodiment, the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot, the third In the embodiment, the second external terminal 81b) and
A recognition control means (first embodiment) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition of the game state has been performed or an unrecognizable state in which the management means cannot recognize the transition. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment. )When,
Is equipped with
As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a mode in which the expectation is relatively low (short-time mode) are set. ,
In the state transition means, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result (for example, the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B), at least the section in which the section progresses in the relatively low mode is from the start timing. It shifts to the first specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle timing.
When shifting to the first specific gaming state, the recognition control means delays the timing for setting the recognizable state until after the timing in the middle of the section (the main control device 71 in the first embodiment). The game is characterized by having a function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment). Machine.

In the game machine of feature B5, when the transition of the game state occurs, the recognition means becomes recognizable, so that the game machine can be well managed in the game hall where many game machines are installed. It will be possible. In addition, since the first specific gaming state in which the section progressing in a mode in which the expectation of granting the predetermined privilege is relatively low occurs from the start timing to at least the intermediate timing is set, the predetermined privilege is granted. It is possible to use the execution of a specific game state as a production while suppressing the influence on the rate, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the setting timing is delayed instead of being set to the recognizable state from the start timing. As a result, when the state shifts to the first specific game state, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first specific game state is set as the specific game state. In, it becomes possible to perform game machine management well.

In addition, for example, if the management means recognizes that the gaming state has changed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of specific gaming states may be lost, and the recognition state is set. It is possible to limit what is done.

Feature B6. As a transition mode of the game state triggered by the first determination result, a second section in which the game content related to the granting of benefits is changed after the first section progressing in the relatively low mode. The specific aspect that occurs is set,
When the transition mode of the gaming state becomes the specific mode, the setting means sets the game state to the recognizable state after the timing in the middle of the first section and by the end of the second section. The gaming machine according to feature B5, which is characterized in that it is.

According to the feature B6, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the game content related to the granting of the privilege, and the first section is used as the transition mode of the game state triggered by the first determination result. In the configuration in which and the second section are set, it becomes possible to perform game machine management well. Further, for example, even if the recognizable state is not set, in the first section where problems in game machine management are unlikely to occur, while emphasizing the improvement of the attention of the game, the game machine management is performed in the second section. Can be performed well.

Feature B7. The first specific gaming state is configured such that after the first section that continues in the relatively low mode, a second section that progresses in the relatively high mode occurs.
When shifting to the first specific gaming state, the setting means is set to the recognizable state after the timing in the middle of the first section and by the end of the second section. The gaming machine according to the feature B5 or B6.

According to the feature B7, the first section and the second section are set in the first specific game state by flexibly setting the recognizable state depending on whether or not the expectation of granting the predetermined privilege is high. In this configuration, it is possible to manage the game machine well. In addition, for example, in the first section where problems in game machine management are unlikely to occur even if the recognizable state is not set, emphasis is placed on improving the attention of the game, and the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relative. When a particularly high second section occurs, it is possible to manage the game machine well.

Feature B8. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means becoming the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. Based on the fact that (for example, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A or the special deviation result), the relatively low aspect continues from the start timing to at least an intermediate timing (for example, in the pattern A). It shifts to open / close execution mode).
The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state proceed in the relatively low mode, and the appearance mode of the game machine operation is either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify is generated from the start timing.
When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a specific timing after the low identification section is started, and shifts to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, wherein the recognizable state is set after the specific timing and before the end of the second section.

According to the feature B8, the game is performed while predicting which of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state is being executed in the low identification section. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set at least until a specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the game machine management by the management means. .. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is low, even if the recognizable state is not set, there is a problem in game machine management. Is hard to occur. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, since the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, it is possible to satisfactorily manage whether or not the second section is set. ..

Feature B9. When shifting to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the low identification section elapses, and when shifting to the first specific gaming state, the low identification section. The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is after that and is set to the recognizable state before the start timing of the second section.

According to the feature B9, the effect of setting the low identification section over the entire low identification section can be prevented from being lost due to the game machine management by the management means, and the second At the timing when the section is started, it becomes possible for the management means to recognize it.

Feature B10. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable entry ball provided in the game area and having an opening (large winning opening 32a) formed in a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32) and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) that executes a variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state is set.
A privilege granting means (payout device 77 and a payout control device 78) that grants a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the opening of the variable ball entry means.
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means.
As a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the expected degree of entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means in the open state is relative. A high expectation mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so as to be high or low.
The first section is a section in which the variable ball entry control is performed according to the low expectation mode, and the second section is a section in which the variable ball entry control is performed according to the high expectation mode. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B9.

According to the feature B10, in the first section, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable ball entry means, and in the second section, it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the game can be diversified during the specific game state by using the variable ball entry means. In this case, by providing the above-mentioned features B3 and B4, the recognizable state can be set depending on whether the operation of the variable ball entry means is used as an effect or is used for the purpose of giving a privilege. By being performed flexibly, it becomes possible to perform good game machine management in a configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state. In addition, for example, in the first section where the production is performed through the operation of the variable ball entry means, emphasis is placed on improving the attention of the game, and in the second section where the frequency of granting benefits to the player is improved, the game machine management. Can be performed well.

Feature B11. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means becoming the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. A second specific gaming state (for example, opening / closing execution mode of pattern A) in which the relatively low aspect continues from the start timing to at least an intermediate timing based on the result (for example, the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A). To move to
The first specific game state and the second specific game state proceed by performing the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode, and the first specific game state in terms of the appearance of the operation of the variable ball entry means. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify which of the state and the second specific gaming state is related to occurs from the start timing.
When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a specific timing after the low identification section is started, and shifts to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the recognizable state is set after the specific timing and before the end of the second section.

According to the feature B11, the game is played while predicting which of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state is being executed in the low identification section. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the game machine management by the management means. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the exit management of the game machine , The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, since the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, it is possible to satisfactorily manage whether or not the second section is set. ..

Feature B12. When shifting to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the low identification section elapses, and when shifting to the first specific gaming state, the low identification section. The gaming machine according to feature B11, which is after that and is set to the recognizable state before the start timing of the second section.

According to the feature B12, the effect of setting the low identification section over the entire low identification section can be prevented from being lost due to the game machine management by the management means, and the second At the timing when the section is started, it becomes possible for the management means to recognize it.

Feature B13. In the low identification section, the effect executing means (symbol display device 41) performs a low identification effect in a mode that is visually indistinguishable or difficult to identify whether it is in the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing an effect determination process for an open / close execution mode in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 and a display control device 111).
When shifting to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the end of the low identification effect, and when shifting to the first specific gaming state, the low identification effect. The gaming machine according to the feature B11 or B12, wherein the recognizable state is set after the end of the second section and before the end of the second section.

According to the feature B13, it is possible to further enhance the effect of setting the low identification section by performing the low identification effect in the low identification section. In this case, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the game machine management by the management means. There is no such thing. In addition, since the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low while the low identification effect is being performed, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game is played. It is difficult for problems to occur in managing the launch of the aircraft. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, since the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, it is possible to satisfactorily manage whether or not the second section is set. ..

Feature B14. As the gaming state that shifts after the specific gaming state, there are cases where a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous.
As a transition mode of the gaming state including the transition to the second specific gaming state, a predetermined transition mode of transitioning to the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous after the second specific gaming state is set. ,
The features B8, B9, characterized in that, in the case of the predetermined transition mode, the setting means is set to the recognizable state before the start timing of the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous. The gaming machine according to any one of B11 to B13.

According to the feature B14, in the low identification section, the game is played while predicting whether the second section will occur after that or the game state in which a specific element is advantageous will occur, and attention to the game It is possible to increase the degree. Further, when a specific element becomes advantageous after the second specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the gaming state is performed, so whether or not the specific element becomes advantageous. It is possible to manage the problem well.

Feature B15. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
With
The transition determination means makes the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
As a transition mode of the gaming state including the transition to the second specific gaming state, a predetermined transition mode of transitioning to the gaming state of the high frequency switching mode after the second specific gaming state is set.
The setting means is set to the recognizable state before the start timing of the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode is set in the case of the predetermined transition mode. Features B8, B9, B11 to B13. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature B15, in the low identification section, the game is played while predicting whether the second section will occur after that or the game state in which the high frequency switching mode will occur, and the degree of attention to the game will be increased. It becomes possible. Further, when the game state shifts to the high frequency switching mode after the second specific game state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the game state is performed. It is possible to manage whether or not it becomes good.

In particular, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, it is possible to manage the frequency of entry into the specific entry section in the game hall and monitor the act of illegally opening the specific entry section. Etc. can be performed well. In addition, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is changed, it is easy for the player to recognize which of the switching modes is, so when shifting to the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode is set. Even if the recognizable state is set, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature B16. The setting means sets the state of the recognition means in the first recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state has been performed or in the first unrecognizable state in which the management means cannot recognize. It is the first setting means to do
Further, the recognition control means has a second recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode has been performed, or a second unrecognizable state in which the management means cannot recognize. The feature B15 is characterized in that a second setting means (a function of executing the processes of step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the recognition means is provided. Game machine.

According to the feature B16, the management means can distinguish between the transition to the specific gaming state and the transition to the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode is performed. Therefore, it is possible to manage whether or not the player is in the specific game state, and also manage whether or not the transition to the high-frequency switching mode is performed without triggering the end of the specific game state. It becomes possible.

In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the first recognizable state is not set in any of the specific gaming states. Then, when the second recognizable state is set, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, if the configuration of the above feature B15 is provided and the game state is changed to the high frequency switching mode after the second specific game state, the first recognizable state is set in advance. Therefore, the above management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B17. The second specific gaming state is set so that the mode after the low identification section is different from the case of the first specific gaming state.
The feature B8 is characterized in that the setting means is set to the recognizable state when the same delay period elapses in both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. , B9, B11 to any one of B16.

According to the feature B17, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above while simplifying the process related to the setting of the delay period.

Feature B18. In the second determination result, the transition to the second specific gaming state occurs due to the relatively low aspect, but when the second specific gaming state ends, the gaming state before the second specific gaming state is completed. It is a judgment result that returns to the same gaming state as
The recognition control means is characterized in that, when the second determination result is obtained, the recognition control means is not set to the recognizable state triggered by the transition of the gaming state. Features B8, B9, B11 The gaming machine according to any one of B13.

According to the feature B18, it is possible to flexibly set the recognizable state according to the transition mode of the gaming state.

Feature B19. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the shift of the game state of the shift judgment means. State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
Recognition means used to make the specific means (hall computer HC) recognize that the transition of the gaming state has been performed (external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the first embodiment, first in the third embodiment). 2 External terminals 81b) and
A recognition control means (first embodiment) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that makes the transition of the gaming state recognizable by the specific means or an unrecognizable state that makes the transition unrecognizable. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment. )When,
Is equipped with
As the transition mode when the determination result of the transition to the specific gaming state is obtained, there are a first section in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low and a relatively high mode. A specific transition mode having a second section to proceed (for example, a transition mode when the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B is obtained) is set.
The mode of transition of the gaming state is specified so that the recognition control means is in the unrecognizable state in at least a part of the first section and is in the recognizable state in at least a part of the second section. Setting means for switching the setting of the recognition means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, in the third embodiment). A gaming machine comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71).

In the game machine of the feature B19, when the transition of the game state occurs, the recognition means becomes a recognizable state, so that the game machine can be managed well. In addition, by setting a specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section occur as the transition mode of the gaming state, the execution of the specific gaming state is produced while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the predetermined privilege. It becomes possible to use it as a game, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, the recognizable state is not uniformly set regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, but the recognizable state and the unrecognizable state are set according to the section to stay. The setting of the recognition means is switched between. As a result, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes a specific transition mode, the recognizable state can be flexibly set, and the game machine management can be performed well in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. Is possible.

Feature B20. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the shift of the game state of the shift judgment means. State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
The recognition means (external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot) used to make the specific means (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state has been changed, and
The recognition control means (main control device 71) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that makes the transition of the gaming state recognizable by the specific means or an unrecognizable state that makes it unrecognizable. The function of executing the processes of step S413, step S511, and step S512 in the MPU 92) and
Is equipped with
As the transition mode when the determination result of the transition to the specific gaming state is performed, there are a plurality of types so that at least one of the mode during the specific gaming state and the mode of transition after the specific gaming state is different. Transition mode is set,
When the transition mode of the gaming state is a specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B is obtained), the recognition control means is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. (For example, a transition mode when an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained), the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 is performed by setting means for delaying the timing of setting the recognizable state. A game machine characterized by having a function to execute).

In the game machine of the feature B20, when the transition of the game state occurs, the recognition means becomes a recognizable state, so that the game machine can be managed well.

In this case, when the transition mode of the gaming state is a specific transition mode, the timing of setting the recognizable state is delayed as compared with the case where the transition mode is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. As a result, it is possible to flexibly set the recognizable state depending on whether the transition mode is a specific transition mode or a predetermined transition mode, and in the configuration in which a plurality of types of transition modes are set as described above, It becomes possible to perform game machine management well.

In addition, for example, if a specific means is made to recognize that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost, and the recognition state is set. It is possible to limit things. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is not set at all but is delayed, it is still possible to manage the game machine.

Feature B21. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the shift of the game state of the shift judgment means. State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
Recognition means used to make the specific means (hall computer HC) recognize that the transition of the gaming state has been performed (external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the first embodiment, first in the third embodiment). 2 External terminals 81b) and
A recognition control means (first embodiment) that sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state that makes the transition of the gaming state recognizable by the specific means or an unrecognizable state that makes the transition unrecognizable. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment. )When,
Is equipped with
As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a mode in which the expectation is relatively low (short-time mode) are set. ,
In the state transition means, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result (for example, the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B), at least the section in which the section progresses in the relatively low mode is from the start timing. It shifts to the first specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle timing.
When shifting to the first specific gaming state, the recognition control means delays the timing for setting the recognizable state until after the timing in the middle of the section (the main control device 71 in the first embodiment). The game is characterized by having a function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment). Machine.

In the game machine of the feature B21, when the transition of the game state occurs, the recognition means becomes a recognizable state, so that the game machine can be well managed. In addition, since the first specific gaming state in which the section progressing in a mode in which the expectation of granting the predetermined privilege is relatively low occurs from the start timing to at least the intermediate timing is set, the predetermined privilege is granted. It is possible to use the execution of a specific game state as a production while suppressing the influence on the rate, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the setting timing is delayed instead of being set to the recognizable state from the start timing. As a result, when the state shifts to the first specific game state, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first specific game state is set as the specific game state. In, it becomes possible to perform game machine management well.

In addition, for example, if the specific means is made to recognize that the gaming state has changed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of the specific gaming state may be lost, and the recognition state is set. It is possible to limit what is done.

By applying the configuration limited to any one of the features A1 to A19 and the configuration limited to any one of the features C1 to C12 to any one of the features B1 to B21. A synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the shift of the game state of the shift judgment means. State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
Recognition means used to make the management means (hall computer HC) outside the game machine recognize that the transition of the game state has been performed (in the first embodiment, the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot, the third In the embodiment, the third external terminal 81c) and
A recognition control means (first embodiment) that sets the state of the recognition means in a recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition of the game state has been performed or an unrecognizable state in which the management means cannot recognize. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and the function of executing the processing of step S413 and step S2119 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment).
Is equipped with
As the gaming state that shifts after the specific gaming state, there are cases where a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous.
As a transition mode of the gaming state including the transition to the specific gaming state, the first transition mode (for example, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A) of transitioning to the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous after the specific gaming state. The transition mode when becomes and the transition mode when the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A is obtained in the high frequency support mode) are set.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the recognition control means is after the timing in the middle of the specific gaming state and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. Setting means for setting the recognizable state at the timing of (the function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the first embodiment, and the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment). A game machine comprising the function of executing the process of step S2119 in the above.

In the game machine of feature C1, when the transition of the game state occurs, the recognition means becomes recognizable, so that the game machine can be well managed in the game hall where many game machines are installed. It will be possible. Further, as the transition mode of the gaming state, the first transition mode of shifting to the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous after the specific gaming state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting timing is delayed instead of being set to the recognizable state from the start timing of the specific gaming state. As a result, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes the first transition mode, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first transition mode is set as the transition mode of the gaming state. In this configuration, it is possible to manage the game machine well.

In addition, for example, if the management means recognizes that the game state has changed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of game state transition modes may be lost, and the game state is set to the recognizable state. It is possible to limit what is done.

Feature C2. The setting means sets the state of the recognition means in the first recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state has been performed or in the first unrecognizable state in which the management means cannot recognize. It is the first setting means to do
Further, the recognition control means makes it possible for the management means to recognize that the transition to the gaming state in which the specific element is advantageous has been performed, or makes the second recognizable state unrecognizable. A feature characterized by being provided with a second setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S516, S905 and S915 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the recognition means in an unrecognizable state. The gaming machine described in C1.

According to the feature C2, the management means can distinguish between the transition to the specific gaming state and the transition to the gaming state in which the specific element is advantageous. Since it is possible, it is possible to manage whether or not a specific game state is in progress, and also manage whether or not a specific element has become advantageous without triggering the end of the specific game state. Can be done.

In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to identify that the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the first recognition is possible even if the transition of the gaming state by the first transition mode occurs. If it is not set to the state, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state when the second recognizable state is set. On the other hand, when the configuration of the above feature C1 is provided and the specific element shifts to the advantageous gaming state after the specific gaming state, the first recognizable state is set in advance. The above management can be performed well.

Feature C3. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low (short-time mode) are set.
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode is described in the feature C1 or C2, which is configured to proceed in the relatively low mode without performing the relatively high mode. Game machine.

According to the feature C3, even if the setting of the recognizable state is delayed during the specific game state, the specific game state progresses in a manner in which the expectation of granting the predetermined privilege is relatively low, so that the game machine management It is hard to cause problems.

Feature C4. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (short-time mode) are set. ,
As a transition mode of the gaming state including the transition to the specific gaming state, a second transition mode different from the first transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of a special deviation result or a low frequency support mode is unspecified and highly accurate. The transition mode when the jackpot result is A) is set,
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode proceed in the relatively low mode, and the appearance mode of the game machine operation is the first transition mode and the second transition mode. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot or is difficult to identify which of the transition modes is involved occurs from the start timing.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a specific timing after the start of the low identification section, and shifts the gaming state. When the mode is the first transition mode, the recognizable state is set at a timing after the specific timing and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3.

According to the feature C4, the game is played while predicting which of the first transition mode and the second transition mode is in the low identification section. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the game machine management by the management means. Further, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine It is difficult for management problems to occur. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is set at the timing before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed, it is possible to manage whether or not a specific element becomes advantageous. It becomes.

Feature C5. The second transition mode is a transition mode in which the relatively high mode does not occur during the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state progresses in the relatively low mode, and after the specific gaming state. Is a transitional mode in which the specific element is disadvantageous in
The setting means is characterized in that, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means is not set to the recognizable state triggered by the transition mode of the gaming state. The gaming machine described in C4.

In order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, a configuration in which the second transition mode is set to a recognizable state as in the case of the first transition mode is also considered. However, in this case, the management means cannot distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode. On the other hand, according to the feature C5, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while eliminating such inconvenience.

Further, in the second transition mode, the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set in the second transition mode, the game It is difficult for problems to occur in machine management.

Feature C6. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable entry ball provided in the game area and having an opening (large winning opening 32a) formed in a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32) and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) that executes a variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state is set.
A privilege granting means (payout device 77 and a payout control device 78) that grants a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the opening of the variable ball entry means.
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means.
As a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the expected degree of entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means in the open state is relative. A high expectation mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so as to be high or low.
Further, as a transition mode of the gaming state including the transition to the specific gaming state, a second transition mode different from the first transition mode is set.
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode proceed by performing the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode, and the operation of the variable ball entry means. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be or is difficult to identify which of the first transition mode and the second transition mode is apparently generated from the start timing.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a specific timing after the start of the low identification section, and shifts the gaming state. When the mode is the first transition mode, the recognizable state is set at a timing after the specific timing and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3.

According to the feature C6, the game is played while predicting which of the first transition mode and the second transition mode is in the low identification section. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the recognizable state is not set until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the game machine management by the management means. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the exit management of the game machine , The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is set at the timing before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed, it is possible to manage whether or not a specific element becomes advantageous. It becomes.

Feature C7. An effect executing means (symbol display device) in the low identification section is a low identification effect in a mode that is visually indistinguishable or difficult to identify whether it is related to the first transition mode or the second transition mode. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing an effect determination process for an opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 and a display control device 111) to be performed in 41).
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the end of the low identification effect, and the transition mode of the gaming state is the first. The transition mode is characterized in that the recognizable state is set at a timing after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. The gaming machine described in C6.

According to the feature C7, it is possible to further enhance the effect of setting the low identification section by performing the low identification effect in the low identification section. In this case, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the game machine management by the management means. There is no such thing. In addition, since the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low while the low identification effect is being performed, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game is played. It is difficult for problems to occur in managing the launch of the aircraft. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is set at the timing before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed, it is possible to manage whether or not a specific element becomes advantageous. It becomes.

Feature C8. The second transition mode is a transition mode in which the specific gaming state ends after the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed a specific number of times, and the specific element is disadvantageous after the specific gaming state. It is a transitional mode that will be
The setting means is characterized in that, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means is not set to the recognizable state triggered by the transition mode of the gaming state. The gaming machine according to C6 or C7.

In order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, a configuration in which the second transition mode is set to a recognizable state as in the case of the first transition mode is also considered. However, in this case, the management means cannot distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode. On the other hand, according to the feature C8, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while eliminating such inconvenience.

Further, in the specific game state in the second transition mode, the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, so even if the recognizable state is not set in the second transition mode. , It is difficult for problems to occur in game machine management.

Feature C9. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
With
The shift determination means makes the determination based on the fact that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion, and also shifts. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high or low.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
In the first transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode shifts to the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode is set. And
The second transition mode is a mode in which after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode shifts to the low probability mode or the high probability mode, and the switching mode shifts to the gaming state of the low frequency switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C8, characterized in that it is present.

The type of transition determination mode can be indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the game machine, whereas the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is different, so that the switching mode is switched. It is difficult to recognize which mode is. Under such circumstances, the feature C9 is not set to the recognizable state in relation to the transition determination mode, but is set to the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode. As a result, the player is made to predict which of the transition determination modes after the specific game state is used, so that the effect of increasing the attention to the game is not lost, and the player enters the specific ball entry section in the game hall. It is possible to manage the frequency of balls and monitor the act of illegally opening a specific ball entry part.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature C10. The first transition mode and the second transition mode are both transition modes performed with the same determination result (for example, unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result A) as a trigger, while the first transition mode is a predetermined game. The transition mode is performed based on the same determination result in the state, and the second transition mode is performed based on the same determination result in a game state different from the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C9, characterized in that it is an embodiment.

According to the feature C10, even if the transition determination result is the same, the transition mode of the subsequent gaming state is different, and it is possible to diversify the game without increasing the types of the transition determination result. Further, even in this case, the recognizable state is set in a flexible manner according to the transition mode, instead of uniformly distinguishing and setting the recognizable state based on the transition determination result. As a result, the game machine can be managed through the setting of the recognizable state without losing the above effect.

Feature C11. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
With
The transition determination means makes the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
The first transition mode is described in any one of features C1 to C10, which is a transition mode in which the switching mode becomes the high frequency switching mode as the specific element after the specific gaming state. Game machine.

According to the feature C11, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, it is attempted to manage the frequency of entry into the specific entry section in the game hall or to illegally open the specific entry section. It is possible to monitor the actions to be taken well. Further, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is changed, the player can easily recognize which of the switching modes is. Therefore, even if the recognizable state is set, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature C12. A transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the judgment result (each jackpot result and special deviation result) corresponding to the shift of the game state of the shift judgment means. State transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
Recognition means used to make the specific means (hall computer HC) recognize that the transition of the gaming state has been performed (external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the first embodiment, first in the third embodiment). 3 External terminals 81c) and
A recognition control means (first embodiment) that sets the state of the recognition means in a recognizable state that makes the transition of the gaming state recognizable by the specific means or an unrecognizable state that makes the transition unrecognizable. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and the function of executing the processing of step S413 and step S2119 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment).
Is equipped with
As the gaming state that shifts after the specific gaming state, there are cases where a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous.
As a transition mode of the gaming state including the transition to the specific gaming state, the first transition mode (for example, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A) of transitioning to the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous after the specific gaming state. The transition mode when becomes and the transition mode when the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A is obtained in the high frequency support mode) are set.
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the recognition control means is after the timing in the middle of the specific gaming state and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. Setting means for setting the recognizable state at the timing of (the function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the first embodiment, and the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment). A game machine comprising the function of executing the process of step S2119 in the above.

In the game machine of the feature C12, when the transition of the game state occurs, the recognition means becomes a recognizable state, so that the game machine can be managed well. Further, as the transition mode of the gaming state, the first transition mode of shifting to the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous after the specific gaming state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting timing is delayed instead of being set to the recognizable state from the start timing of the specific gaming state. As a result, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes the first transition mode, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first transition mode is set as the transition mode of the gaming state. In this configuration, it is possible to manage the game machine well.

In addition, for example, if a specific means is made to recognize that the game state has changed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of game state transition modes may be lost, and the recognition state is set. It is possible to limit what is done.

By applying the configuration limited to any one of the features A1 to A19 and the configuration limited to any one of the features B1 to C21 to any one of the features C1 to C12. A synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. The transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state and the determination result of the transition determination means shift the gaming state. The first transition means (main control device 71) that shifts the game state to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the determination result corresponding to the above. (Function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92), and when the end condition is satisfied and the specific game state ends, the game state shifts to a game state different from the previous game state of the specific game state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) having a second transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71)
Information that makes it possible to recognize the transition status of the game state is acquired from the game machine, and the acquisition result is a result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state in the game machine. Specific control means (hall computer) for executing the process (process of step S1504 in the first embodiment, process of step S1705 and step S1712 in the second embodiment, process of step S2306 and step S2310 in the third embodiment). HC) and
In a game system equipped with
The gaming machine has a mode in the specific gaming state and the specific gaming state as a transition mode when the transition determination result may be performed by both the first transition means and the second transition means. Multiple types of migration modes are set so that at least one of the later migration modes is different.
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode among the plurality of types of transition modes, the specific control means executes the specific correspondence process at a specific timing, while the transition of the gaming state is performed. When performed in the second transition mode, the response means that does not execute the specific response process at the specific timing (the function of executing the process of step S1504 in the MPU 201 in the first embodiment, the second embodiment A gaming system including a function of executing the processes of steps S1705 and S1712 in the MPU 201, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2306 and S2310 in the MPU 201 in the third embodiment).

According to the feature D1, the specific response process is executed by the specific control means at a specific timing in the first transition mode, while the specific response process is executed at a specific timing in the second transition mode. Not done. As a result, it becomes possible to flexibly execute the specific correspondence process in the case of the first transition mode and the case of the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. With this configuration, it is possible to manage game machines well.

Further, for example, when the specific response process is executed by the specific control means, the execution of the specific response process is restricted when there is a risk that the effect of setting a plurality of types of migration modes may be lost. It becomes possible to do.

From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the degree of attention to the game.

The "specific timing" includes the start timing of the specific game state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific game state becomes the specific time, and the specific game device operates in the specific game state. The configuration includes a case where the operation of the game device is started or ended a predetermined number of times. Further, in the configuration in which the opening period and the ending period are set in the specific game state, the timing during any of these periods is also included.

Feature D2. A notification means (data counter DC) provided corresponding to the game machine is provided.
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the response means executes the specific response process so that the notification in the predetermined mode is performed by the notification means at the specific timing. When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the state in which the notification according to the predetermined mode is not performed is maintained at the specific timing. Features The gaming system according to D1.

According to the feature D2, the execution timing of the notification and the pattern of the presence / absence of the notification according to the predetermined mode in the notification means are different depending on the type of the transition mode of the gaming state. As a result, if the notification means is notified in a predetermined mode, the execution of the notification in the predetermined mode may be restricted when there is a risk that the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It will be possible.

In addition, by performing the notification under the predetermined conditions instead of not performing the notification in the predetermined mode at all in the notification means, for example, the manager of the game hall may or may not have cheated on the game machine through the content of the notification in the notification means. It is possible for the player to simply confirm the above, and for example, the player can select the game machine to play the game by referring to the content of the notification in the notification means.

Feature D3. The specific control means indicates that the transition has been performed regardless of whether the transition of the gaming state is performed according to the first transition mode or the transition of the gaming state is performed according to the second transition mode. A storage execution means for storing the indicated information in the storage means (RAM 203) as management data (a function of executing the process of step S1503 in the MPU 201 in the first embodiment, steps S1802, step S1805 and step in the MPU 201 in the second embodiment). The gaming system according to feature D2, which comprises a function of executing the process of S1808, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2303, step S2305, and step S2308 in MPU201).

According to the feature D3, the manager of the game hall confirms the management data even if the configuration of the feature D2 is provided and the execution timing of the notification and the pattern of the presence / absence of the notification are different depending on the predetermined mode in the notification means. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the state of transition of the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to manage the game machine in the game hall well while keeping the effect of setting the plurality of types of transition modes.

Feature D4. The game machine
A recognition means (external terminal plate 81) used to make the specific control means recognize that the game state has been changed, and
A recognition control means for controlling the recognition means (a function of executing an external output setting process at the time of mode transition in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the second embodiment, and an MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2011, step S2119, step S2206, and step S2208) in
Is equipped with
When the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the recognition control means controls the recognition means so that the recognition means becomes a predetermined recognizable state when the specific gaming state is started. When the transition mode of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the recognition means is controlled to be in a predetermined recognizable state when the specific gaming state is started.
The response means executes the specific response process based on the acquisition result of information through the recognition means, and also executes the specific response process.
Based on the recognition means being in the predetermined recognizable state, the memory executing means shifts the gaming state regardless of whether the transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. The gaming system according to feature D3, wherein information indicating the start timing of the above is stored in the storage means as the management data.

According to the feature D4, the manager of the game hall confirms the management data even if the configuration of the feature D2 is provided and the execution timing of the notification and the pattern of the presence / absence of the notification are different depending on the predetermined mode in the notification means. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the start timing of the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to manage the execution status of the specific game state satisfactorily while keeping the effect of setting the plurality of types of transition modes.

Feature D5. The first transition mode is a mode in which a specific degree of advantage becomes advantageous during or after the specific gaming state.
The second transition mode is a mode in which the specific degree of advantage is disadvantageous.
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the response means performs the specific response process at the specific timing before the situation in which the specific advantage becomes advantageous is started. On the other hand, when the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the state in which the specific correspondence process is not executed is maintained even if the specific timing is reached. The gaming system according to any one of the features D1 to D4.

According to the feature D5, the specific correspondence process is not executed uniformly, but is flexibly executed according to the content of the specific advantage of the migration destination. As a result, while making it possible to manage the situation where a specific degree of advantage is advantageous in a game hall or the like, for example, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is a factor of the execution of the management. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

Feature D6. The first transition mode is a mode in which after the specific gaming state, the transition to the first gaming state in which a specific element (support mode) for varying the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous is achieved.
The second transition mode is a mode in which after the specific gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state in which the specific element becomes relatively disadvantageous is performed.
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the response means executes the specific response process at the specific timing before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the feature D1 to the feature D1 to the feature D1 The gaming system according to any one of D4.

According to the feature D6, the specific correspondence process is not uniformly executed, but is flexibly executed according to the game state after the specific game state. As a result, while making it possible to manage the game state after the specific game state well in the game hall, for example, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is eliminated due to the execution of the management. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

The specific element may be configured so that the advantage of the element can be recognized from the operation of the game machine.

Further, the configuration newly limited by the feature A4 may be applied to the feature D5. In this case, a synergistic effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature D7. As the mode of the specific gaming state, the gaming machine has a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a mode in which the expectation is relatively low (short-time mode). Has been set and
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode proceed in the relatively low mode, and the appearance mode of the game machine operation is the first transition mode and the second transition mode. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot or is difficult to identify which of the transition modes is involved occurs from the start timing.
When the transition to the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the corresponding means is after the start of the low identification section and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the specific response process is executed at a specific timing, when the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the state in which the specific response process is not executed is maintained even at the specific timing. The gaming system according to feature D6, characterized in that it is to be played.

According to the feature D7, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the specific element becomes advantageous or disadvantageous after the specific gaming state in the low identification section of the specific gaming state, so that the player is in the specific gaming state in the low identification section. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be in an advantageous state later. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the specific response process is not executed at least until the intermediate timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section, for example, is not lost due to the game machine management by the specific control means. .. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific game state progresses in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the specific response process is not executed, in terms of game machine management. It is hard to cause problems. Furthermore, if a specific element becomes advantageous after the specific game state, the specific response process is executed before the transition to the first game state is performed, so whether or not the specific element becomes advantageous. Can be well managed.

Feature D8. The game machine
A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable entry ball provided in the game area and having an opening (large winning opening 32a) formed in a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32) and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) that executes a variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state is set.
A privilege granting means (payout device 77 and a payout control device 78) that grants a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the opening of the variable ball entry means.
Is equipped with
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means.
Further, as a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the degree of expectation of the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means in the open state. A high expectation mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so that is relatively high or low.
In the specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed as a section from the start timing to at least the intermediate timing. In addition to proceeding with the above, a low identification section is configured so that it is impossible or difficult to identify which of the first transition mode and the second transition mode is related to the appearance of the operation of the variable ball entry means. Has been
When the transition to the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the corresponding means is after the start of the low identification section and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the specific response process is executed at a specific timing, when the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the state in which the specific response process is not executed is maintained even at the specific timing. The gaming system according to feature D6, characterized in that it is to be played.

According to the feature D8, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether a specific element becomes advantageous or disadvantageous after the specific gaming state in the low identification section of the specific gaming state, so that the player is in the specific gaming state in the low identification section. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be in an advantageous state later. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the specific response process is not executed at least until the intermediate timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section, for example, is not lost due to the game machine management by the specific control means. .. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the specific response process is not executed, there is a problem in the ball ejection management of the game machine. Is hard to occur. Furthermore, if a specific element becomes advantageous after the specific game state, the specific response process is executed before the transition to the first game state is performed, so whether or not the specific element becomes advantageous. Can be well managed.

In addition, as the specific game state, it is configured to have a round game which is controlled so as to be terminated when the number of balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit, and further, the round game. In a configuration in which a specific game state corresponding to a round game is set, which is terminated based on the execution of a predetermined maximum number of times.
In the high expectation mode, during the period in which the variable ball entry control according to the mode is executed, the maximum number of game balls are likely to enter the variable ball entry means to be controlled. In contrast to the aspect
In the low expectation mode, the upper limit number of game balls does not enter the variable ball entry means to be controlled during the period when the variable ball entry control according to the embodiment is executed. The configuration may be such that it is unlikely to occur.

Further, in order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering the game ball between the low expectation mode and the high expectation mode, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of the variable ball entry control is in the open state. May be set to a period shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Further, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of the variable ball entry control is in the open state is a period equal to or longer than the launch cycle of the game ball, and the launch cycle of the game ball × n (n is greater than the upper limit number). Small number) The configuration may be set to the following period. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the configuration may be such that the above n is any number of "1", "2" or "3".

Feature D9. The gaming machine provides a low identification effect in a mode in which it is visually indistinguishable or difficult to identify whether it is in the specific gaming state according to the first transition mode or in the specific gaming state according to the second transition mode. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing an effect determination process for an opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 and a display control device 111) to be performed by the effect execution means (design display device 41) in a low identification section. Ori,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the corresponding means is the specific one after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the specific response process is executed at the timing, when the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the state in which the specific response process is not executed is maintained even at the specific timing. The gaming system according to feature D8, characterized in that.

According to the feature D9, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the specific element becomes advantageous or disadvantageous after the specific game state in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, so that the player operates the variable ball entry means. The game is performed while visually recognizing the mode and the low identification effect and expecting that the state will be advantageous after the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the specific response process is not executed in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is not lost due to the game machine management by the specific control means. In addition, since the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low while the low identification effect is being performed, even if the specific response process is not executed, the gaming machine It is difficult for problems to occur in terms of ball ejection management. Furthermore, if a specific element becomes advantageous after the specific game state, the specific response process is executed after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first game state is performed. It is possible to manage whether or not the above factors are advantageous.

Feature D10. The specific response process is a process executed in response to the transition to the specific game state.
Further, the specific control means is a special process execution means that executes a special process in response to the transition to the first game state after the end of the specific game state to be executed of the specific response process. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1511 in the MPU 201, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1718 in the MPU 201, and in the third embodiment, the process of step S2314 is executed in the MPU 201. The gaming system according to any one of features D6 to D9, which comprises a function).

According to the feature D10, since the specific control means executes the processing corresponding to each of the transition to the specific gaming state and the transition to the first specific gaming state, it is specified. It is possible to manage whether or not the game is in the game state, and it is also possible to manage whether or not the transition to the first game state has been performed without triggering the end of the specific game state. Will be.

In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, if the specific correspondence process is not executed in any of the transition modes, the special process is performed. When executed, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature D6 is provided, and when the game shifts to the first game state after the specific game state, the specific response process is executed in advance, so that the above management can be performed satisfactorily. ..

The configuration newly limited by the features A9 or A10 may be applied to any one of the features D1 to D10. In this case, a synergistic effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature D11. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a mode in which the expectation is relatively low (short-time mode) are set.
As a determination result of the transition determination means, the transition to the specific gaming state occurs in the relatively low mode, but when the specific gaming state ends, the same game as the previous gaming state of the specific gaming state. A partial transition result (special deviation result) that returns to the state is set,
The specific control means does not execute the specific response process when the game state shift occurs based on the partial shift result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the mode in the specific game state based on the appearance of the game machine operation from the start timing of the specific game state to at least the intermediate timing as the partial transition result. Or, it is configured so that a low identification section that is difficult to identify occurs.
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the response means maintains a state in which the specific response process is not executed at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming system according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that.

According to the feature D11, since the partial transition result is set, the influence on the transition rate of the gaming state excluding the specific gaming state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the privilege to the player, and the specific gaming state is suppressed. It becomes possible to use the transition to. Further, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, a low identification section that cannot be distinguished or is difficult to distinguish from the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured, so that the specific gaming state is sandwiched in the low identification section. The game is played while predicting whether the transition of the game state will occur. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the specific response process is not executed at least until the intermediate timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section by the game machine management by the specific control means is not lost. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific game state progresses in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the specific response process is not executed, in terms of game machine management. It is hard to cause problems.

Feature D12. The game machine
A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable entry ball provided in the game area and having an opening (large winning opening 32a) formed in a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32) and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) that executes a variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state is set.
A privilege granting means (payout device 77 and a payout control device 78) that grants a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the opening of the variable ball entry means.
Is equipped with
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means.
Further, as a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the degree of expectation of the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means in the open state. A high expectation mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so that is relatively high and low.
As a determination result of the transition determination means, a transition to the specific gaming state that ends after the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed a specific number of times occurs, but when the specific gaming state ends. A partial transition result (special deviation result) for returning to the same gaming state as the previous gaming state of the specific gaming state is set.
The specific control means does not execute the specific response process when the game state shift occurs based on the partial shift result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the mode of the specific game state based on the fact that the operation mode of the variable ball entering means from the start timing of the specific game state to at least an intermediate timing results in the partial transition result. It is configured so that there are low identification sections that are difficult to identify.
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the response means maintains a state in which the specific response process is not executed at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming system according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that.

According to the feature D12, since the partial transition result is set, the influence on the transfer rate of the game state excluding the specific game state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the privilege to the player, and the specific game state is suppressed. It becomes possible to use the transition to as a production. Further, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, a low identification section that cannot be distinguished or is difficult to distinguish from the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured, so that the specific gaming state is sandwiched in the low identification section. The game is played while predicting whether the transition of the game state will occur. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the specific correspondence process is not executed at least until the intermediate timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the game machine management by the specific control means. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the specific response process is not performed, there is a problem in the ball ejection management of the game machine. Is hard to occur.

Feature D13. The gaming machine has a low identification effect of a mode that is visually indistinguishable or difficult to identify whether it is in the specific gaming state according to the partial transition result or in the specific gaming state according to the second transition mode. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing an effect determination process for an opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 and a display control device 111) to be performed by the effect execution means (design display device 41) in the identification section. ,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the corresponding means maintains a state in which the specific correspondence process is not executed at least until the low identification effect is completed. The gaming system according to the feature D12.

According to the feature D13, since the specific correspondence process is not executed in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the game machine management by the specific control means. There is no such thing. In addition, since the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low while the low identification effect is being performed, even if the specific response process is not executed, the gaming machine It is difficult for problems to occur in terms of ball ejection management.

Feature D14. The game machine
A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
Is equipped with
The shift determination means makes the determination based on the fact that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion, and also shifts. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high or low.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
In the second transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode shifts to the gaming state in which the low frequency switching mode is set. And
The corresponding means is characterized in that, when the transition of the game state is performed in the second transition mode, the specific response process is not executed triggered by the transition of the game state. The gaming system according to D12 or D13.

The type of transition determination mode can be indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the game machine, whereas the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is different, so that the switching mode is switched. It is difficult to recognize which mode is. Under such circumstances, in the feature D14, the transition determination mode is changed across the specific gaming state, but in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the low frequency switching mode, the specific response process triggered by the change occurs. Not executed. As a result, when a specific gaming state having a low identification section occurs, it is possible to continue the expectation of the player not only in the low identification section but also after the specific gaming state.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature D15. The game machine
A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific ball entry portion (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
Is equipped with
The shift determination means makes the determination based on the fact that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion, and also shifts. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high or low.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
In the second transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode shifts to the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode is set. And
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the corresponding means is after the low identification section is started and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. The gaming system according to feature D12 or D13, wherein the specific correspondence process is executed at the timing of.

The type of transition determination mode can be indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the game machine, whereas the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is different, so that the switching mode is switched. It is difficult to recognize which mode is. Under such circumstances, in the feature D15, the transition determination mode is changed with the specific gaming state in between, and in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the high frequency switching mode, the gaming state is changed to after the specific gaming state. Specific response processing is executed at the timing before the migration is performed. This makes it possible to play the game while expecting that it will be in an advantageous state after the specific game state in the low identification section, and manage the frequency of entering the specific ball entry part in the game hall and identify it illegally. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the act of trying to open the ball entry portion.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature D16. The transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state and the determination result of the transition determination means shift the gaming state. A function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 to shift the game state to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the determination result corresponding to the above. ), And a gaming machine (pachinko machine 10)
Information that enables recognition of the transition status of the gaming state is acquired from the gaming machine, and the acquisition result is for recognition based on the result corresponding to the transition of the gaming status occurring in the gaming machine. Specific control means (hall computer HC) that outputs
In a game system equipped with
The gaming machine is relative to the first section, which proceeds in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low, as a transition mode when the determination result of the transition to the specific gaming state is obtained. A specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result B is obtained) having a second section that progresses in a particularly high mode is set.
The specific control means recognizes that the output for recognition is not performed in at least a part of the first section, and the output for recognition is performed in at least a part of the second section. Output means (a function of executing the process of step S1504 in the MPU 201 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1705 and S1712 in the MPU 201 in the second embodiment, and a step in the MPU 201 in the third embodiment. A gaming system including a function of executing the processes of S2306 and step S2310).

According to the feature D16, a specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section occur is set as the transition mode of the gaming state, so that the specific gaming state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the predetermined privilege. It becomes possible to use the execution of the game as a production, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, the output for recognition is not uniformly output regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, but the setting of the output for recognition is switched according to the section to stay. .. As a result, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes a specific transition mode, the output for recognition is flexibly performed, and the game machine management can be performed well in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. It will be possible.

The configuration newly limited by the feature B2 or B3 may be applied to the feature D16. In this case, a synergistic effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature D17. The transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state and the determination result of the transition determination means shift the gaming state. A function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 to shift the game state to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the determination result corresponding to the above. ), And a gaming machine (pachinko machine 10)
Information that makes it possible to recognize the transition status of the game state is acquired from the game machine, and the acquisition result is a result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state in the game machine. Specific control means (hall computer) for executing the process (process of step S1504 in the first embodiment, process of step S1705 and step S1712 in the second embodiment, process of step S2306 and step S2310 in the third embodiment). HC) and
In a game system equipped with
As the mode of the specific gaming state, the gaming machine has a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a mode in which the expectation is relatively low (short-time mode). As well as being set
In the state transition means, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result (for example, the explicit high accuracy jackpot result B), at least the section in which the section progresses in the relatively low mode is from the start timing. It shifts to the first specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle timing.
When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the specific control means delays the timing of executing the specific response process until after the timing in the middle of the section (MPU201 in the first embodiment). In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1504, the function of executing the process of step S1705 and step S1712 in MPU201, and the function of executing the process of step S2306 and step S2310 in MPU201 in the third embodiment). A game system characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D17, a first specific gaming state is set in which a section in which the expected degree of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively low occurs from the start timing to at least an intermediate timing. It is possible to use the execution of a specific game state as a production while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the privilege of, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

In this case, in the case of the first specific game state, the specific correspondence process is not executed from the start timing, but the execution timing is delayed. As a result, when the state shifts to the first specific game state, the specific response process is flexibly executed according to the progress status, and the first specific game state is set as the specific game state. In, it becomes possible to perform game machine management well.

Further, for example, when the specific response process is executed by the specific control means, the execution of the specific response process is restricted when there is a risk that the effect of setting the first specific game state may be lost. It becomes possible to do.

Feature D18. A notification means (data counter DC) provided corresponding to the game machine is provided.
The specific control means acquires information that makes it possible to recognize the transition state of the gaming state from the gaming machine, and the acquisition result is a result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state occurring in the gaming machine. Based on this, the specific response process is executed so that the notification according to the predetermined mode is performed by the notification means.
When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the response means delays the timing of executing the specific response process so that the notification according to the predetermined mode is not executed until after the timing in the middle of the section. The gaming system according to feature D17, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature D18, when the state shifts to the first specific gaming state, the execution timing of the notification according to the predetermined mode in the notification means is delayed. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution of the notification in the predetermined mode when there is a risk that the effect of setting the first specific gaming state may be lost when the notification in the predetermined mode is performed in the notification means. It becomes.

In addition, by performing the notification under the predetermined conditions instead of not performing the notification in the predetermined mode at all in the notification means, for example, the manager of the game hall may or may not have cheated on the game machine through the content of the notification in the notification means. It is possible for the player to simply confirm the above, and for example, the player can select the game machine to play the game by referring to the content of the notification in the notification means.

Feature D19. When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the specific control means stores the information indicating the start timing of the transition in the storage means (RAM 203) as management data (second execution). The feature D18 is characterized in that the MPU 201 has a function of executing the processes of steps S1802, S1805 and S1808, and a third embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2303 in the MPU 201). Game system.

According to the feature D19, even if the configuration of the feature D18 is provided and the execution timing of the notification according to the predetermined mode in the notification means is delayed when the state shifts to the first specific gaming state, the game hall By confirming the management data, the administrator of the above can grasp the start timing of the first specific game state. As a result, it is possible to manage the execution status of the first specific gaming state satisfactorily while keeping the effect of setting the first specific gaming state.

Feature D20. The game machine
A recognition means (external terminal plate 81) used to make the specific control means recognize that the game state has been changed, and
The recognition control means for controlling the recognition means (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the external output setting process at the time of mode transition in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and
Is equipped with
The recognition control means controls the recognition means so that the recognition means becomes a predetermined recognizable state when the first specific gaming state is started when the first specific gaming state is started.
The response means is characterized in that the specific response process is executed when a predetermined delay period elapses from the timing when the recognition means is grasped to be in the predetermined recognizable state. Features The gaming system according to D18 or D19.

According to the feature D20, while the start timing of the first specific game state can be recognized by the specific control means, the execution of the notification of the predetermined mode corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state can be delayed to a preferable timing. it can. Therefore, by bringing the recognition means into a predetermined recognizable state, it is possible to achieve both good execution management of the first specific gaming state in the specific control means and execution of the notification of the predetermined mode in the notification means at a good timing. It becomes possible to plan.

Feature D21. In the game machine, as a transition mode of the game state triggered by the first determination result, the game content related to the granting of the privilege is changed after the first section progressing in the relatively low mode. A specific mode in which the second section occurs is set.
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the specific mode, the response means executes the specific response process after the timing in the middle of the first section and by the end of the second section. The gaming system according to any one of the features D17 to D20, which is characterized in that it is to be played.

According to the feature D21, the specific response process is flexibly executed according to the game content related to the granting of the privilege, and the first section is a transition mode of the game state triggered by the first determination result. In the configuration in which and the second section are set, it becomes possible to perform game machine management well. Further, for example, in the first section where problems in game machine management are unlikely to occur even if the specific response process is not executed, while emphasizing the improvement of the attention of the game, the game machine management is good in the second section. It becomes possible to do it.

Feature D22. The first specific gaming state is configured such that after the first section that continues in the relatively low mode, a second section that progresses in the relatively high mode occurs.
When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the response means executes the specific response process after the timing in the middle of the first section and before the end of the second section. The gaming system according to any one of features D17 to D21.

According to the feature D22, the first section and the second section are set in the first specific game state by flexibly executing the specific correspondence process depending on whether or not the expectation of granting the predetermined privilege is high. In this configuration, it is possible to manage the game machine well. In addition, for example, in the first section where problems in game machine management are unlikely to occur even if the specific response process is not executed, emphasis is placed on improving the attention of the game, and the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high. When a high second section occurs, it is possible to manage the game machine well.

Feature D23. The response means is a storage execution means (first) that stores information that can be recognized by the manager of the game hall as management data in the storage means (RAM 203) as the specific response process when the second section is executed. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1503 in the MPU 201, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S1802, step S1805 and step S1808 in the MPU 201, and in the third embodiment, the functions of step S2305 and step S2308 in the MPU 201. The gaming system according to feature D22, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature D23, the manager of the game hall can grasp the number of occurrences and the timing of occurrence of the second section by checking the management data. This makes it possible to manage the first section and the second section separately.

Feature D24. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means becoming the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. Based on the fact that (for example, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A or the special deviation result), the relatively low aspect continues from the start timing to at least an intermediate timing (for example, in the pattern A). It shifts to open / close execution mode).
The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state proceed in the relatively low mode, and the appearance mode of the game machine operation is either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify is generated from the start timing.
When the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed, the response means maintains a state in which the specific response process is not executed at least until a specific timing after the start of the low identification section, and the response means. When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the specific correspondence process is executed after the specific timing and before the end of the second section. The gaming system according to any one of D23.

According to the feature D24, the game is played while predicting which of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state is being executed in the low identification section. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the specific correspondence process is not executed at least until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the game machine management by the specific control means. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific game state progresses in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is low, a problem arises in game machine management even if the specific response process is not executed. It's hard. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, since the specific correspondence process is executed by the end of the second section, it is possible to satisfactorily manage whether or not the second section is set.

Feature D25. The game machine
A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable entry ball provided in the game area and having an opening (large winning opening 32a) formed in a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32) and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) that executes a variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state is set.
A privilege granting means (payout device 77 and a payout control device 78) that grants a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the opening of the variable ball entry means.
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means.
Further, as a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once by the variable ball entry control means, the degree of expectation of the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means in the open state. A high expectation mode (long-time mode or medium-time mode) and a low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so that is relatively high or low.
The first section is a section in which the variable ball entry control is performed according to the low expectation mode, and the second section is a section in which the variable ball entry control is performed according to the high expectation mode. Characteristic The gaming system according to any one of features D17 to D24.

According to the feature D25, in the first section, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable ball entry means, and in the second section, it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the game can be diversified during the specific game state by using the variable ball entry means. In this case, by providing the configuration such as the above feature D17, the execution of the specific response process can be flexibly performed depending on whether the operation of the variable ball entry means is used as an effect or is used for the purpose of giving a privilege. By performing this, it becomes possible to satisfactorily manage the gaming machine in the configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state. In addition, for example, in the first section where the production is performed through the operation of the variable ball entry means, emphasis is placed on improving the attention of the game, and in the second section where the frequency of granting benefits to the player is improved, the game machine management. Can be performed well.

Feature D26. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means becoming the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. A second specific gaming state (for example, opening / closing execution mode of pattern A) in which the relatively low aspect continues from the start timing to at least an intermediate timing based on the result (for example, the explicit high accuracy jackpot result A). To move to
The first specific game state and the second specific game state proceed by performing the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode, and the first specific game state in terms of the appearance of the operation of the variable ball entry means. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify which of the state and the second specific gaming state is related to occurs from the start timing.
When the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed, the response means maintains a state in which the specific response process is not executed at least until a specific timing after the start of the low identification section, and the response means. When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the feature D25 is characterized in that the specific correspondence process is executed after the specific timing and before the end of the second section. The game system described.

According to the feature D26, the game is played while predicting which of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state is being executed in the low identification section. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, since the specific correspondence process is not executed until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the game machine management. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the specific response process is not executed, there is a problem in the ball ejection management of the game machine. Is hard to occur. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, since the specific correspondence process is executed by the end of the second section, it is possible to satisfactorily manage whether or not the second section is set.

Feature D27. The gaming machine produces a low identification effect in a mode that is visually indistinguishable or difficult to identify by looking at whether it is in the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state in the low identification section. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing an effect determination process for an open / close execution mode in the MPU 102 of the voice emission control device 72 and a display control device 111) to be performed by the device 41).
When the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed, the corresponding means maintains a state in which the specific correspondence process is not executed at least until the end of the low identification effect, and the first specific gaming state. The game according to feature D26, wherein when the transition to is performed, the specific correspondence process is executed after the end of the low identification effect and before the end of the second section. system.

According to the feature D27, it is possible to further enhance the effect of setting the low identification section by performing the low identification effect in the low identification section. In this case, since the specific response process is not executed in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect may be lost due to the game machine management by the specific control means. Absent. In addition, since the expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low while the low identification effect is being performed, even if the specific response process is not executed, the gaming machine It is difficult for problems to occur in terms of ball ejection management. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, since the specific correspondence process is executed by the end of the second section, it is possible to satisfactorily manage whether or not the second section is set.

Feature D28. In the gaming machine, as a gaming state to shift after the specific gaming state, a case where a specific element (support mode) for varying the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous are set. And
As a transition mode of the gaming state including the transition to the second specific gaming state, a predetermined transition mode of transitioning to the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous after the second specific gaming state is set. ,
The corresponding means is to execute the specific correspondence process before the start timing of the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous when the transition of the gaming state is performed in the predetermined transition mode. The gaming system according to feature D24, D26 or D27.

According to the feature D28, in the low identification section, the game is played while predicting whether the second section will occur after that or the game state in which the specific element is advantageous will occur, and attention to the game It is possible to increase the degree. In addition, if a specific element becomes advantageous after the second specific gaming state, the specific correspondence process is executed before the transition to the gaming state is performed, so whether or not the specific element becomes advantageous. Can be well managed.

Feature D29. The game machine
A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 51) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A specific ball entry unit (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area, which allows the game ball to enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
Acceptance control means (a function of executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
Is equipped with
The transition determination means makes the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined conditions is satisfied when the game ball enters the specific entry portion.
The acceptance control means has a low frequency as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state, in which the chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time is relatively low. It has a switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
Further, as a transition mode of the gaming state including the transition to the second specific gaming state, a predetermined transition mode of transitioning to the gaming state of the high frequency switching mode after the second specific gaming state is set.
The corresponding means is characterized in that, when the transition of the gaming state is performed in the predetermined transition mode, the specific correspondence process is executed before the start timing of the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode is set. Features The gaming system according to D24, D26 or D27.

According to the feature D29, in the low identification section, the game is played while predicting whether the second section will occur after that or the game state in which the high frequency switching mode will occur, and the degree of attention to the game will be increased. It becomes possible. Further, when the game state shifts to the high frequency switching mode after the second specific game state, the specific response process is executed before the transition to the game state is performed, so that the game state is set. It is possible to manage whether or not it is good.

In particular, by executing the specific response process in relation to the switching mode, it is possible to manage the frequency of entry into the specific entry section in the game hall and monitor the act of illegally opening the specific entry section. Can be done well. In addition, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state related to the movement of the specific ball entry portion is changed, it is easy for the player to recognize which of the switching modes is, so when shifting to the gaming state in which the high frequency switching mode is set. Even if the specific response process is executed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of migration modes is not lost.

In addition, the "specific ball entry portion" has an opening provided in the game area and formed to a size that allows the game ball to enter, and the opening is a first state in which the game ball can enter. It may be configured to be switchable to a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter.

Feature D30. The specific response process is a process executed in response to the transition to the specific game state.
Further, the specific control means executes a special process in response to the transition to the game state of the high frequency switching mode after the end of the specific game state to be executed of the specific response process. Special processing execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1511 in the MPU 201 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1718 in the MPU 201 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2314 in the MPU 201 in the third embodiment. The gaming system according to feature D29, which comprises a function of executing processing).

According to the feature D30, in the specific control means, the process is executed corresponding to each of the transition to the specific gaming state and the transition to the gaming state in the high frequency switching mode. Therefore, it is possible to manage whether or not the user is in the specific game state, and also manage whether or not the transition to the high frequency switching mode is performed without triggering the end of the specific game state. It becomes possible.

In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific game state and the second specific game state, if the specific response process is not executed in any of the specific game states, When a special process is executed, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific game state. On the other hand, after the second specific game state, when the game state shifts to the high frequency switching mode, the specific response process is executed in advance, so that the above management can be performed well. be able to.

Feature D31. The second specific gaming state is set so that the mode after the low identification section is different from the case of the first specific gaming state.
The corresponding means is characterized in that the specific correspondence process is executed when the same delay period elapses in both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. , D26 to any one of D30.

According to the feature D31, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above while simplifying the process related to the setting of the delay period.

Feature D32. In the second determination result, the transition to the second specific gaming state occurs due to the relatively low aspect, but when the second specific gaming state ends, the gaming state before the second specific gaming state is completed. It is a judgment result that returns to the same gaming state as
Described in the feature D24, D26 or D27, wherein the specific control means does not execute the specific response process triggered by the transition of the gaming state when the second determination result is obtained. Game system.

According to the feature D32, it is possible to flexibly execute the specific correspondence process according to the transition mode of the gaming state.

Feature D33. The transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state and the determination result of the transition determination means shift the gaming state. A function of executing the processes of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 to shift the game state to the specific game state (open / close execution mode) based on the determination result corresponding to the above. ), And a gaming machine (pachinko machine 10)
Information that makes it possible to recognize the transition status of the game state is acquired from the game machine, and the acquisition result is a result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state in the game machine. Specific control means (hall computer) for executing the process (process of step S1504 in the first embodiment, process of step S1705 and step S1712 in the second embodiment, process of step S2306 and step S2310 in the third embodiment). HC) and
In a game system equipped with
The game machine
As the gaming state that shifts after the specific gaming state, there are cases where a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous.
As a transition mode of the gaming state including the transition to the specific gaming state, the first transition mode (for example, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result A) of transitioning to the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous after the specific gaming state. The transition mode when becomes and the transition mode when the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result A is obtained in the high frequency support mode) are set.
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the specific control means shifts to the gaming state after the timing in the middle of the specific gaming state and after the specific gaming state. Correspondence means for executing the specific correspondence process at the previous timing (a function of executing the process of step S1504 in the MPU 201 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of steps S1705 and S1712 in the MPU 201 in the second embodiment). , The third embodiment is a gaming system including a function of executing the processes of steps S2306 and S2310 in the MPU 201).

According to the feature D33, as the transition mode of the gaming state, the first transition mode of shifting to the gaming state in which the specific element becomes advantageous after the specific gaming state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased. Can be enhanced.

In this case, when the transition mode of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the specific correspondence process is not executed from the start timing of the specific gaming state, but the execution timing is delayed. As a result, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes the first transition mode, the specific response process is flexibly executed according to the progress of the transition mode, and the first transition mode is set as the transition mode of the game state. With this configuration, it is possible to manage game machines well.

Further, for example, when the specific response process is executed by the specific control means, the specific response process is executed when there is a risk that the effect of setting the first transition mode as the transition mode of the gaming state may be lost. It is possible to limit what is done.

It should be noted that the configuration newly limited by any one of the above features D1 to D32 may be applied to the above feature D33. In this case, a synergistic effect can be obtained by applying each of these configurations.

Feature D34. A recognition means (external terminal plate 81) used to make the specific control means recognize that the game state has been changed, and a recognition control means (MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the recognition means. ), And is applied to the gaming system according to any one of features D1 to D33.

It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of constructing a gaming system that exhibits the effects described in any one of the above features D1 to D33.

According to each of the above features, the following problems can be solved.

For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine draws a lot based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions, and when the lottery result is a predetermined result, the game state shifts to a jackpot state. appear. Further, in order to enable the game machine to be managed in the game hall, there is known a configuration in which information for recognizing one's own game state is output from the game machine to a game hall management computer or the like.

For example, by outputting a signal from the gaming machine to the effect that it is in the jackpot state, the management computer can grasp that the gaming machine is in the jackpot state. Then, when a fraudulent act of paying out a large amount of game media is performed, the game hall indicates that a large amount of game media is paid out even though the signal output indicating that the jackpot is in the state is not output. It becomes possible for the manager of the above to recognize it, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent activity from being continued for a long period of time.

Further, for example, a game hall in which counter indicators are arranged side by side corresponding to each game machine is known, and in the game hall, the number of transitions such as a jackpot state is displayed as a counter according to a signal output from the game machine. It is made to be notified by a device. In this case, the player can select the game machine to play the game by referring to the content notified by the counter display.

Here, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game in the game machine, and one method of this is to improve the transition mode of the game state. However, if an attempt is made to improve the transition mode of the gaming state while using the conventional configuration as it is for the signal output to the game hall, at least one of the game machine management and the improvement of the degree of attention to the game through the signal output There is concern that problems will arise.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in the area, and gives a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

Rotating game machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 32a ... Large winning opening, 34 ... Lower operating port, 41 ... Design display device, 51 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 71 ... Main control device, 72 ... Voice emission control device, 77 ... payout device constituting the privilege granting means, 78 ... payout control device constituting the privilege granting means, 81 ... external terminal board as a means for recognition, 92 ... MPU, 102 ... MPU, 111 ... display control device, DC ... data Counter, HC ... Hall computer.

Claims (2)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player,
A variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball entry control means that executes variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is set to the open state, and
A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition the gaming state based on the satisfaction of predetermined conditions, and
Specific control setting means for setting the variable ball entry control to a specific control state in which the variable ball entry control is performed a predetermined number of times based on the determination result of the transition determination means corresponding to the transition of the gaming state. When,
In a game machine equipped with
As a unit mode when the variable ball entry control is performed once in the variable ball entry control means, a plurality of types of unit modes are set so that the mode when the variable ball entry means is in the open state is different. And
As the execution mode of the specific control state, the specific unit mode in which the ball is relatively likely to enter the variable ball entry means among the plurality of types of unit modes is executed according to the number of times during the specific control state. The first execution mode and the second execution mode are set in advance so that the number of times the predetermined unit mode in which the ball is relatively unlikely to enter the variable ball entry means is continuously executed is different.
This game machine is
The first display means and
A second display means whose display range is set narrower than that of the first display means,
A first display control means for causing the first side corresponding display to be performed by the first display means when a transition to the specific control state occurs.
A second display control means for causing the second side corresponding display to be performed by the second display means when a transition to the specific control state occurs.
With
The first execution mode and the second execution mode differ in the number of times the predetermined unit mode is continuously executed .
The first display control means has a case of shifting to the specific control state of the first execution mode and a case of shifting to the specific control state of the second execution mode, the first execution mode and the second execution mode. A means for enabling the first-side correspondence display to be performed in a mode in which it is not possible to identify which of the execution modes the specific control state is executed is provided.
The second display control means corresponds to the second side in different modes depending on the case of shifting to the specific control state of the first execution mode and the case of shifting to the specific control state of the second execution mode. With means to ensure that the display is done
The specific control state of the first execution mode has a configuration in which the specific unit mode is executed more times than the specific control state of the second execution mode.
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state after the specific control state of the first execution mode is completed is more advantageous than the gaming state after the specific control state of the second execution mode is completed. .. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the machine is a pachinko machine.

Images